JP6535220B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game medium, and the game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display means is a specific display result. Are configured to provide the player with

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, with the game value, when the specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state, and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions for award ball payout.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. When it is done, a "big hit (specific game state)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Further, in pachinko gaming machines, predetermined information (for example, a jackpot determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, and the like for a variable display that has not yet started despite the game ball passing through the start area (for example, start winning opening). Are stored as pending storage, and the pending display is displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, pending storage display unit) corresponding to each pending storage.

  Among such gaming machines, there is one configured to be able to display a specific hold display that is operated and displayed at a predetermined cycle as the hold display. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a black circle is disposed at the periphery of a circular display, and the black circle can be configured to display a specific hold display in a mode in which the black circle rotates at a low speed or a high speed in a predetermined direction. .

JP 2012-254201 A (paragraph 0395, FIG. 42)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the interest of presentation is insufficient.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game .

(Means A) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and specifying a specific display (for example, hold display) corresponding to the variable display. The display mode and the determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing the steps S1217A and S1217B in the game control microcomputer 560), the display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (For example, “o” in the second embodiment: see FIG. 59A) and the special mode (for example, six lines are drawn outside “o” in the second embodiment: 60 (B)) and the special mode (for example, “×” is included in “○” in the second embodiment: see FIGS. 59 (B1) and (B2)), and the determination of the determination means Based on the result, Special effect executing means (for example, in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is capable of executing special effects (for example, preview effects in the second embodiment) for displaying the fixed display in a special mode (for example, in the second embodiment) A portion that executes S67106, S67114, S1813, etc. Suggestive effects execution means (for example, the second embodiment) that can execute the suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S67110, S67115, S1806, S1813, and the like) and a predetermined effect (eg, movement effect of the sub image display device 51) in which the visibility of the specific display decreases. , And FIG. 69 etc.), and the game machine is abnormal. The anomaly notification (for example, anomaly notification image ("Abnormal 1 occurrence", "Abnormal 2 occurrence", etc.) that is notified when it occurs can be notified in a recognizable manner even when a predetermined effect is being executed. (For example, refer to FIG. 68, FIG. 69, etc.) The suggestion effect execution means is a first indication effect (eg, suggestion effect (success pattern)) in which the display mode of the specific display changes after the effect, and When it is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, suggestion effect (pass pattern)) in which the display mode does not change, and the specific display is displayed in a special mode (for example, at the time of pre-reading effect restriction flag set) when a specific display is not displayed by a special manner (e.g., during pre-read presentation restriction flag unset) Ri executable der the second suggested effect more frequently compared to (e.g., FIG. 58 (a) (B) such as See At least specific display and displayed by a conventional manner, as the target and a specific display being displayed by a special manner, it is feasible first suggested effect and the second suggested effect, it is characterized. According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the suggestion effects are executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game entertainment can be improved.
(Means 1) The other gaming machines according to the present invention are each based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14). Specified as variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs variable display of multiple types of distinguishable identification information (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol) A gaming machine that is in a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when the display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, though the game medium passes through the start area A pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage buffer, a second pending storage buffer) for storing predetermined information as pending storage for variable display not yet started, and each pending storage stored in the pending storage means Hold display control means (for example, a portion for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100) for displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold display control means at least the game medium has passed through the start area A specific effect (for example, appearance effect) accompanying the display of the hold display is executed later, and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) as a hold display in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a probability change state (high probability / high base state)) Specific holding display (for example, the specific holding display shown in FIG. 50) displayed in the operation) can be displayed, and the holding display control means is that the game medium has passed through the starting area while the specific holding display is displayed. When a new specific hold display is displayed based on, while the specific effect is being executed, the new specific hold display is displayed on the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed. Synchronizing the work display features (e.g., step S6012~S6025 in effect control microcomputer 100, portions for performing the S6027～S6038) that. According to such a configuration, since the operation display of the specific hold display is synchronized, when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable, it is possible to secure the appearance of the hold display.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the hold display control means displays, as the specified hold display, the first specified hold display (for example, the normal specified hold display shown in FIG. 50A) and the first specified hold display. It is possible to simultaneously display the second specific hold display (for example, the prefetch specific hold display shown in FIG. 50B) having different modes, and the operation display of the first specific hold display and the operation of the second specific hold display Synchronize with the display (for example, when it is determined in steps S6014, S6044 and S6050 whether or not there is a specific hold display that is already being displayed, whether the specific hold display is a normal specific hold display or a prefetch specific hold display) It is possible to display the normal identification hold display and the read ahead identification hold display at the same time, since there is no particular distinction between the existence and the operation of the normal identification hold display and the read ahead identification hold display. Create display and synchronizing) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, since the operation display of the specific suspension display having different display modes is also synchronized, it is possible to secure the appearance of the suspension display when the specific suspension display is configured to be displayable.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the predetermination means (for example, step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560 is executed to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display is derived or displayed Specific determination means (for example, game control) that determines whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result before the decision of the predetermining means and the prior determination means The step of executing steps S1217A and S1217B in the microcomputer 560, and the display mode of the suspension display is the normal mode (for example, "o" in the second embodiment: see FIG. 59A); A special aspect which is an aspect different from the normal aspect (for example, six lines are drawn outside the “o” in the second embodiment: FIG. 0 (see B) and the first special mode (for example, “X” in “○” in the second embodiment is an example different from the normal mode and the special mode). B1) and the second special aspect (for example, two “×” are included in “○” in the second embodiment: see FIG. 59 (B2)), and the determination result of the specific determination means On the other hand, the suspension announcement effect that displays the suspension display corresponding to the suspension storage subject to the determination of the specific determination means in different proportions in the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, in the second embodiment A portion performing execution effect means (for example, in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S67106, S67114, S1813, etc. in the second embodiment) (see FIG. 54B) , The out-execution means may change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (for example, the timing of start winning, any shift timing, any other timing, etc.) Means for performing suggestion suggestion that is possible and suggesting whether or not the display mode of the suspension display changes (for example, in the second embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for effect control performs steps S671110, S67115, S1806, S1813 etc. are further provided, and the suggestion effect execution means indicates at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. (For example, in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S). Part to run the 806 or the like. 58 (A) and (B)) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so diversity in timing to change the display mode of the hold display In addition to being able to be held, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestive effect is executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to 3, the ordinary variable display means (for example, the ordinary symbol display 10) for variably displaying the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and the ordinary variable display means Normal identification information determination means (for example, in the normal symbol process processing of step S 27 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not the display result of the normal identification information to be displayed is to be a predetermined display result (for example, hit symbol) When the predetermined display result is derived in the normal variable display means and the portion executing the determination processing of the normal symbol), the game medium can easily pass through the variable winning device forming the start area (for example, the hit state) Advantage state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560) to control the gaming state) normal symbol process processing of step S27 Based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to an open state and the establishment of a predetermined condition, the gaming state is controlled to an advantageous state as compared to the normal state (for example, a low base state) Game state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S167 and S170 in the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling to a special game state (for example, high base state) in which the frequency of being played is increased Special effect executing means (for example, in the third embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for effect control) that executes special effects (see FIG. 64) when variable display of identification information based on pending storage is performed. And the special effect executing means is controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. The special effect is executed when the variable display of the identification information based on the pending storage stored at the same time is performed (steps S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 62, step S8000B in FIG. 66 (especially in the case of “Y”) ), S8000C, and FIG. 63), when the variable display of the identification information based on the holding storage stored when being controlled to the advantageous state in the special gaming state is not performed special effects (see FIG. Steps S1601 and S1602 in step 62, step S8000B in FIG. 66 (especially, in the case of “N”), and FIG. 63), hold storage stored when being controlled to the advantageous state in the special game state in the normal state Game media when the start-up area is controlled to an advantageous state, with When a variable passage of identification information based on the hold storage stored when being controlled to the advantageous state in the special gaming state stored in the hold storage means is performed when a has passed, special effect is executed (Steps S1603 and S1605 in FIG. 62, and step S8000B (particularly in the case of “Y”) in FIG. 66, and S8000C and see FIG. 63). According to such a configuration, the frequency of executing special effects increases, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to 4, between the display device having the display area (for example, the effect display device 9) and the first position and the second position different from the first position A movable member (for example, the sub-image display device 51 in the fourth embodiment) which moves, and an abnormality detection means (for example, in the fourth embodiment) for detecting effects of abnormality occurring in the gaming machine 100) a portion performing the process of step S1701) and abnormality information (for example, an abnormality notification image) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in response to the abnormality detection means detecting an abnormality Abnormality display control means for performing abnormality display control to be displayed in the area (for example, in the fourth embodiment, step S1704 in the effect control microcomputer 100 The movable member covers a part of the display area from the player side when it is at least in the first position (see, eg, FIGS. 68 and 69), and the abnormality display area is It may be configured to be an area not covered by the movable member located at the first position (see, for example, FIG. 68, FIG. 69, etc.). According to such a configuration, even when the movable member is at the first position, the abnormality information can be easily viewed.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern classification determination table for loss. It is an explanatory view showing a hit change pattern judging table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss change pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a symbol specification command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding display control processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a reservation notice decision table. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a gaming state (mode), a mode of hold display, presence / absence of appearance effect, and a synchronization timing of an operation display of the hold display. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a specification pending display. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a display mode of appearance production and specific suspension display. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a display mode of appearance production and specific suspension display. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading production decision processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect execution decision table and a final display mode decision table in the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination table in a 2nd embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect change timing determination table in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 1st pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of the start winning combination in 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining special production in a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining special production in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormality alerting | reporting control process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image etc. in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image etc. in a 4th embodiment.

Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that “variable display synchronizes” means that the start point and end point of the variable display are the same and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the display color that reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the type of big hit (usually the display color may differ depending on whether it is a big hit or a probability change big hit). When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color which reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the off color For example, it is displayed in blue at the time of out, while it is displayed in red at the time of big hit Note that the type of big hit (usually either big hit or positive variation big hit) The display color may be made different depending on the presence or absence.) The display color when the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is turned off is the same as the background image when the light is turned off. It is desirable that the display image has a display color (eg, black) different from that of the background image in order to prevent the display from being obscured.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). At the lower right of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of activated winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, ie, the first number of pending storages (pending storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning storage) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators to display the number of activated winning balls entered the second start winning opening 14, ie the second reserve memory number Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number are provided. There is. Although this embodiment shows the case where the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are displayed individually, the total number of the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages is a total number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory display part which displays the number of pending | holding memory may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfaction of execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. Also, when configured as such, in the combined hold storage display unit, the first hold storage and the second hold storage are displayed side by side in the winning order for the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 To be displayed in a recognizable manner as to whether it is the first pending storage or the second pending storage (for example, the first pending storage is displayed in red and the second pending storage is displayed in blue) It may be configured.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In this embodiment, as described later, microcomputer 560 for game control which controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol transmits the fluctuation pattern command which can specify fluctuation time, and is received by microcomputer 100 for effect control. According to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol is controlled. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the event that a change in data of the fluctuation pattern command or the like occurs, the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 side and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as data corruption of a command occurs, a situation may occur in which the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the rendering symbol are not completely synchronized.

  In the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, on the left side, a movable member 78 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moving when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a notice effect (a movable object notice effect) or a super reach effect is performed. Note that the movable member 78 may be operated, for example, in a pseudo-series effect, not limited to the movable object preview effect or the super reach effect. In this embodiment, when the movable object preview effect or the super reach effect is executed, the light emission control of the light guide plate is performed in addition to the movement of the movable member 78 as described later.

  Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as a effect blade role) which is attached to the rotary shaft of the motor 87 below the left and right and moves when the motor 87 rotates. 79a, 79b are provided. The effect blade parts 79a and 79b operate, for example, when a notice effect (effect blade function notice effect) is performed. Note that the effect blade combinations 79a and 79b may be operated, for example, in a pseudo-series effect or a super reach effect, without being limited to the effect blade combination preview effects.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning openings (ordinary winning openings) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of prize gaming balls determined in advance based on the winning of the gaming balls. The game balls that have won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “o” and “x”) called a normal symbol.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol is visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it becomes a hit. . Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is a high state (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a variation display result of the special symbol is increased as compared to the normal state). In the high probability state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the left and right periphery of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an decoration LED 25 which blinks during the game, and at the lower part there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, on the upper left and right of the game area 7, two speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means operable by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation, but also with a dial that allows the player to perform a rotation operation. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit is a probability change, the game state is shifted to a so-called positive change state after the big hit game is over, and the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start winning (namely, special symbol It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that execution conditions of variable display in the displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the high base state, transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol time short state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the rendering symbol is shortened. By shifting to such a time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol becomes high (in other words, It is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start winning will occur. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the game state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 53 updates the numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and the start is generated at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 53 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560) The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

  In addition, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 There is. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of the big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35. Control the sound output from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 through the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 87 for operating the effect blade role members 79 a and 79 b through the output port 106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player via the input port 107.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving an LED or a lamp is input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. In addition, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, if the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, for example, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 13). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not, instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 53 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 53 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the effect pattern variably displayed in the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is made a big hit symbol, reach production is always executed (However, in the case of sudden positive change big hit, sudden change positive hit large hit symbol (for example "135") without becoming reach) May appear stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not made a big hit symbol, the microcomputer 560 for game control decides whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. Do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state. In the normal symbol process processing of step S27, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball to the gate 32, and the variable display result is derived or displayed, or the variable display result of the normal symbol Executes a process of controlling the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state or in the closed state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit) There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, the small hit is an allowed hit up to the number of times the number of opening of the large winning opening is smaller than the number of the large winning opening (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 seconds). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening time of 0.1 seconds twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely It is a short jackpot, and it is a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it were suddenly changed to a definite change state Is). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the case where the gaming machine is configured such that all the big hit types are probability variation big hits, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is “non-reach”. The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when non-reaching and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3-Normal PB 2-4, Super PA 3-3-Super PA 3-4, Super PB 3-3-Super PB 3-4, Special PG 1-1-Special PG 1-3, Special PG 2-1-Special PG 2-2 fluctuation pattern Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-representation, which is used when the sudden variation is not a big hit or a small hit, when using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, a re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of the sudden big hit or small hit and which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by reach type, and a change pattern type including a change pattern with normal reach, a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach A, and a change pattern with super reach B It may be divided into the variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of an effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability change big hit, a normal CA 3-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and a fluctuation with normal reach and a pseudo ream It is classified into normal CA 3-2 which is a variation pattern type including a pattern, and super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type accompanied by super reach. Also, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA 4-1 which is a variation pattern type including non-reach variation pattern and special CA 4-2 which is a variation pattern type including variation pattern with reach. ing. Moreover, when it is a small hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Moreover, in the case of a loss, non-reach CA2-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns without reach or pseudo ream or slip rendition, and fluctuation patterns not accompanied by reach but pseudo ream or slip rendition Includes non-reach CA2-2 that is the variation pattern type that includes, non-reach CA2-3 that is the variation pattern type that includes the variation pattern of reduced variation that does not involve reach or pseudo reciprocation or slip rendition, and includes the variation pattern that includes only normal reach A variation pattern type including normal CA2-4 that is a variation pattern type, a normal CA2-5 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two reruns of pseudoruns, and a variation pattern with a normal reach and one rerun pseudorun. And normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type including, and variation pattern types with super reach Are the type divided into a certain super CA2-7.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hitting determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state. Even if the small hit occurs even when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state, and if it is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to be the positive change, although the current playing state is the positive changing state Rather, it makes the player feel bothersome. Therefore, if small hits are not generated during the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits are less likely to be generated when the gaming state is a definite change state, and a turning effect for a definite change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 53 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), eight judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit classification determination table 131b, 2 judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" (a ratio of 2/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability change big hit (2 round big hit) as a first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value, and the game There are cases where it is decided that the normal special hit and the probability change big hit (15 round big hit) as the second specific gaming state that grants the game value more than the value, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed However, the game value to be awarded is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended since all 15 rounds are internally ended, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, internally undivided rounds remain Therefore, the big hit game may be continued (the effect that opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open) may be performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 7R probability variation big hit that controls 7 rounds of big hit games or a 5R probability variation big hit that controls 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal jackpot” is a jackpot controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifted to a time saving state (high base state) after the jackpot gaming state is over (see steps S167 and 168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished 100 times, the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140 described later). In this embodiment, the time saving state ends even if a big hit occurs before ending the execution of the variable display 100 times after shifting to the time saving state (see step S132 described later).

  The "probably big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a high probability state It is also shifted to the time saving state (high base state) (see steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, after the termination of that sudden oddity big hit gaming state is transitioned to the definite change state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the positive change state and in the short time state (high base state) (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, according to the jackpot type determination result, a fluctuation pattern type, a random number for fluctuation pattern type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, which is normal CA 3-1 to normal CA 3-2, Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of the super CA 3-3, the special CA 4-1, and the special CA 4-2 are set.

  For example, the variation pattern type determination table 132A for big hit shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normally big hit”, and FIG. 9 (B) used when the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in, the allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made, and the ratio determined to be the same fluctuation pattern type can be made different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least Super Reach (Super Reach A, Super Reach B) is performed.

  In addition, for super reach big hit, fluctuation pattern type with pseudo ream (fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns of super PA3-3, super PA3-4) and fluctuation pattern type without pseudo ream (super PB3-3, super And the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, a variation pattern type with a super reach and a pseudo run, a super reach and a pseudo run, in both the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal hit and the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B. A variation pattern type not to be accompanied is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation big hit", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1, special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation big hit" The judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is suddenly controlled to the big hit state according to the big hit type being "suddenly odd change big hit", it is different from the case where the big hit state due to the big hit or positive hit is usually controlled. It can be determined as the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, when it is determined that the variable display result is made a small hit symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number (random 2) for change pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), in the case where it is determined to be a small hit, it is shown that special CA 4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the release variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows a change pattern type determination table for disengagement 135C used when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a disappointing pattern, a plurality of types of variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for loss are used based on random numbers (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the separate fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135C are used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state and when the total number of pending storages is three or more. However, it may be configured to use the common out-of-transition variation pattern type determination table in the case of the probability variation state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, although the case of using the common fluctuation variation type determination table 135C for deviation for time variation is used regardless of the total number of pending storages, for deviation for probability variation / time reduction As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for loss (depending on the ratio of determination values) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the outset variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total number of pending storages is less than 3 and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more Although the case where two types of tables, such as the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table 135B used for, are used is shown, the way of dividing the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for 0 total pending storages, 1 total pending storage, 2 total pending storages) The outset fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used separately for the total number of pending storages of three, the total number of pending storages for four, and so on). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, and the total pending storage number 4.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of pending storages, but according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number, the outlier variation pattern type determination A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing variable display of the first special symbol, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number) Out of change variation pattern type judgment table for 0, 1 first pending storage number, 2 for 1st pending storage number, 3 for 1st pending storage number, 4 for 1st pending storage number, ... Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the first pending storage number 0 to 2, for the first pending storage number 3, for the first pending storage number 4. Even in this case, when the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. . In addition, even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that the “specific effect mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least the expectation for a big hit is set high, such as a variation pattern with super reach, and the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, “expected degree for big hit (reliability)” indicates the appearance rate (probability) that a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific effect mode is executed. ing. For example, the jackpot expectation when the variable indication with the super reach is performed is determined as (the ratio at which the super reach is performed when it is determined to be a big hit) / (when it is determined to be a big hit and as a loss) The rate at which the super reach is performed in both cases is calculated by calculating

  In each of the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of the random numbers (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type judgment, which are non reach CA2-1 to non reach CA2-1. A judgment value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of 3, normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, and super CA 2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination Is 230-251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for determination of the variation pattern type If 1 is 1 to 79, it can be understood that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least not with the reach (without the effect such as the pseudo ream or the slip effect) regardless of the total number of pending storages. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A, 135B) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (the variation pattern with reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights stored by the pending storage means (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer) (the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, the total pending storage number) Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are configured to be assigned. Note that “variable display patterns other than reach variable display patterns”, as described in this embodiment, for example, do not involve reach, do not accompany effects such as pseudo-trains or slip effects, and the variable display results It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, although the case of using the common jackpot variation pattern type determination table regardless of the current gaming state is shown, whether the current gaming state is a definite change state The jackpot variation pattern type determination table separately prepared may be used depending on whether it is in the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the shortening fluctuation pattern is determined by selecting the shortening out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 10 (B). Although a case is shown where there is a case, the total number of pending storages (the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages may be used when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state The threshold of) may be made different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the total number of pending storages is three (or, for example, when the number of first pending storages and the number of second pending storages is two), for shortening By selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss and making the variation pattern of the shortening variation determined in some cases, when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a time saving state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 Even in the case of (or, for example, even in the case of 0 or 1 where the number of first pending storages and the number of second pending storages is smaller), the variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected for shortening It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "big hit" or "small hit", the change pattern determination is performed according to the determination result of the big hit type or the change pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is to be any of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of CA4-1 and the special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect pattern is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the "big hit".

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern type includes normal CA 3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a pseudo link. The case where it is classified into a certain normal CA3-2 and a super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a super reach (sometimes with a pseudo reach with a super reach) is shown. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA 4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA 4- that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with a reach. The case of being classified into 2 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 11 (B), you may divide a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of production | presentation, such as a pseudo | simulation series and a slip production, instead of dividing a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1 which are fluctuation patterns without pseudo ream or slip rendition, and the special CA 4-2 involves pseudo ream or slip rendition You may comprise so that special PG1-2, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A determines that the variable display result is “off” based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to decide fluctuation pattern in either of multiple types. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 to A 003 (H) are presentation control commands (big hit start designation commands: fan fare designation commands) for designating a start of the big hit game by displaying the fan fare screen. In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, or a small hit / suspiciously definite variation jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the “normal jackpot”, and the jackpot start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is in the “normal jackpot”. In the case of "Suddenly Positive Variation Big Hit" or "Small Hit", the small hit / sudden positive variation big hit start specification command (A003 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 1 designated command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 1 specified command (A 301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “normal big hit” is ended. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 2 designated command: ending 2 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. Note that the big hit end 2 designated command (A 302 (H)) is used when the big hit game due to “probable variation big hit” is ended. The command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 3 specified command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (probable change state background specification command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is a definite change state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the pending storage information, an effect control command indicating that the number of pending storages has increased or decreased for the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (the first pending storage number addition designation Although the case where the command and the second pending storage number addition designation command are transmitted is shown, the form of the pending storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, for example, the pending storage of the following aspect Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased is specified, and the number of pending storages of the increased one (The first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has been specified in that one command, and the total pending storage count is EXT data May be set and transmitted.

(3) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The increased number of pending storages (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is the effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, or the type of the big hit among the judgment results when winning is there. In addition, command C6XX (H) is the effect control command indicating the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random value for the variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect processing (see FIG. 22) described later, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit or not, the type of big hit It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a type of a big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and Based on the fluctuation category command, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the winning-time effect processing described later that the “off” is to occur, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be made, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes a “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read out when setting the symbol specifying command and when setting the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is, and which display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol is displayed, the random pattern determination random number at the start winning combination A value is set to the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of R falls within the range of any determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is normal and off at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type becomes the non-reach CA2-1 based on the change category 1 command being received. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination value 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA 2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  The threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above change categories belongs to are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. The values are derived by picking up values that can be the boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the out-of-plane variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the subsequent variation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and they are assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that may be a boundary of the range of the determined value.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state becomes a definite variation state, a short time state, and a departure at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 in step S232 of the prize time rendering process described later. It is determined whether or not .about.219. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19 (ie, if it becomes the variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-3), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “08 (H)” Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send variation category 10 command.

  Note that, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be allocated to the range of the determination value 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when performing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the effect at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is a disconnection, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the determination processing of the gaming state in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is determined at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, if it is the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation data in which “10 (H)” is set to the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 22 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-3). Send variation category 23 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes “probable big hit” at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “13 (H)” as the variation category Send 24 commands. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3) Send variation category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the start winning combination suddenly becomes a definite positive big hit, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning presentation processing described later. Determine If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “16 (H)” as the variation category 27 Send a command. Next, if the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “17 (H)” as the variation category Send 28 commands.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set to the EXT data.

  It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not necessarily the same between when the winning determination is made at the start winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command It may also occur that the pattern type does not match the fluctuation pattern type actually used in the fluctuation display. However, in this embodiment, for at least non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3 variation pattern types, common judgment values are allocated regardless of the total number of pending storages. There is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Therefore, in this embodiment, a suspension notice effect to be described later is executed on the fluctuation display determined to be at the time of winning when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 or super CA3-3. The variation category command shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, only when it is determined that the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3 is determined The variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of the winning determination result of the other variation pattern types. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it becomes other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3, even if it transmits fluctuation category command which shows that fluctuation pattern classification can not be specified. Good.

  Note that "pending advance notice effect" is a type of so-called pre-reading advance notice effect that is executed prior to the start of the variable display targeted for the advance notice effect, and the first pending storage display unit 9a and the second pending storage This is a notice effect performed by displaying the on-hold display on the display unit 9b in a display mode different from the normal mode. In this embodiment, the on-hold notice effect is executed at the timing when the on-off effect or on-hold display described later is displayed based on the occurrence of the start-up winning for the variable display to be notified. In addition, the display of the suspension display is temporarily started in the normal display mode at the timing when the appearance effect or the suspension display to be described later is displayed based on the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be the advance notice. For example, the on-hold notice effect may be performed by changing the on-hold display to a display mode different from the normal display timing at the on-hold shift timing).

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs when the time saving state (high base state), or the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 during the big hit game Except when it occurs (see steps S1215A and S1216A), the process of the winning determination is executed each time a start winning occurs, and the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 15 is transmitted and the variations shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 A category command is sent. Then, based on the received symbol designating command and variation category command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to reach a big hit or reach in advance before the variable display of the advance notice object is started. Execute a pending notice effect to give notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command consisting of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8 a in a variable display (variation) of the effect design corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special Image display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the image display that performs the presentation with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIGS. 18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, when the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 53 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where random numbers such as the jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer as hold storage, the predetermined information stored as the hold storage is It is not limited to random numbers. For example, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit may be determined in advance based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a pending storage in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer .

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time-shortening flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-shortening state (high base state) is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the prize effect processing is executed to determine in advance the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step) (step S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218A) and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning on first start winning opening 13 occurs and a winning at-a-time effect process of step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  However, if it is determined in step S 1215 A or step S 1216 A that Y was not determined to be executed in step S 1217 A, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the first pending storage count addition specification command in step S 1220 A. Control is not performed to transmit the determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) at the time of winning. It should be noted that when the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed, a value indicating the incompletion determination result can not be specified (for example, "FF (H)") is set as the EXT data specification result specification A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the processing of step S1215A, only when the gaming state is the low base state, the processing of step S1217 A prize effect process is executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1216A, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. At the time of winning the effect processing is executed. It should be noted that the process may not shift to step S 1217 A only in the big hit gaming state, and may shift to step S 1217 A to execute the prize effect processing in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control that the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening of the final round is finished and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S305) to the big hit end processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (B). In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending opening). Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S1211 B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 53 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the time of the fluctuation start of the second special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218 B), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218 B and S1219 B, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the second start winning opening 14 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217 B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of steps S1218 B to S1220 B and the winning at presentation processing of step S1217 B is executed, symbol designation is performed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  Also in the second starting opening switch passage process, the same process as step S1215A may be performed, and if the time saving state is selected, the effect process at the time of winning in step S1217B may not be executed. That is, only when it is the normal state (low base state), the winning a prize effect process of step S 1217 B may be executed to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command.

  Further, also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as step S1216A may be performed, and when in the big hit game, the effect process at the time of winning in step S1217B may not be executed. In addition, in the second starting opening switch passing processing, it is possible not to execute the winning a prize production processing of step S1217 B (that is, it is possible not to perform the winning a prize determination processing for the second special symbol) .

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a prize-time effect process of steps S1217A and S1217B. In the prize effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing to start the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within the range of any judgment value by executing the winning presentation process. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is executed, and the microcomputer for effect control is based on the judgment result at the time of winning as described later. Execute a pending advance notice effect to predict that it will be a big hit or a super reach during the change display of the production design by 100.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state) Whether or not it is confirmed (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are checked to see if they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed from when it is confirmed in step S221 whether or not it is a positive change condition at the start winning combination and the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. In the case where a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit has occurred before, it changes from the normal state to the positive change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the in-winning effect processing of step S 1217 A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hitting determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8B). It is determined whether it matches with the small hit judgment value set in (for special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing at step S1217 B), a small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (C) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" as the symbol designation command Processing is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing to determine the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and whether it is a short time state (specifically, whether a positive change flag or a short time flag is set) Determine In addition, after confirming whether or not the vehicle is in the definite variation state and the time saving state in step S225 at the start winning combination, a plurality of variable displays are actually started until the variation display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes in the period from when it is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is a definite change state and whether it is a short time state at the start winning combination, until the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. (For example, when a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, it may change from the normal state to the positive change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for removal in accordance with the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination in advance is incorporated, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of any determination value by determining whether it is larger than the threshold value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 219 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 219 (ie, when it is 1 to 219). Determines that “08 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When it is not the threshold 219 or less (ie, when it is 220-251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU sets thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 79 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is equal to or less than 89 (that is, if it is 80 to 89), it is determined that "01 (H)" is to be set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 99 or less (ie, 90 to 99), it is determined that "02 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). In addition, when the threshold is 169 or less (ie, in the case of 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is equal to or less than the threshold 214 (ie, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 229 or less (ie, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (ie, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in ascending order of threshold value, so the one determined in the later order threshold is used. It does not fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 or less of the threshold value of the previous order. It is determined whether or not it is in the range of Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown where determination is made as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order of threshold value, but conversely, 229, 214, in ascending order of threshold value. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. The same applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values described below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may be always set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the determination value is common to at least the variation pattern types that cause "super reach", it is determined whether or not "super reach". be able to.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 designates EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" will be a symbol designation command A process of setting to is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a small hit threshold (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251, and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (which is 1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined to set the EXT data “18 (H)” as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at-step presentation processing in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8D). Using the special symbol) 131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing process at step S1217 B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E) Using 131 b, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that "normal big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that "normal big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "certain variation big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that "suddenly a probability change big hit" is found, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that "sudden change probability big hit" will be made as a symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for big hit according to the big hit classification determined at Step S229 (Step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it determines that "normal big hit". In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 149 or less (ie, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In addition, when it is not the threshold value 149 or less (ie, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined to set "12 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the “probable big hit” is made, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 38 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 38 (ie, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is not 79 or less (ie, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that "a sudden probability big hit", the threshold value 100 is set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 100 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 100 (ie, 1 to 100). Determines that “16 (H)” is to be set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 100 or less (ie, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228 and S231 and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which of the values of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment It is determined whether the range is the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, and the set fluctuation pattern type in step S232. The range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number or any variation pattern type may be determined using the determination table.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result as a variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 selects one of “00 (H)” to “0 B (H)”, “10 B (H)”, and “10 (H)” as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. (H) “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command.

  In this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within which range. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit will be made, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it is determined that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command indicating comprehensively a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, although it is not shown up to which variation pattern type specifically the microcomputer 100 for effect control, it is indicated that the variation pattern type comprehensively becomes any of the big hit variation pattern types On the basis of the reception of the category command, an on-hold notice effect to be described later may be executed.

  FIG.23 and FIG.24 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 or not (step S52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

  In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol is performed as shown in this embodiment, in the winning a prize processing process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and the comparison with the jackpot determination value in the positive change state (high probability state) may not be performed (specifically, step S220). Only the process may be performed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, it is between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual change. Deviation can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the pending storage number subtraction designated command (the first pending storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control in the order of the designated command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designated command). Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passing processing or in step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passing processing. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the non-probable change state (normal state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the decision result of the big hit type, it decides the stop symbol of the special symbol which one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9” which becomes the big hit symbol Do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9 (A ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9 (D (FIG. 9 (D)) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S95). In this embodiment, the time-shortening flag is set when transitioning to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game based on the big hit normally, and is also shifted to the definite changing state at the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit The time saving flag is set because it is also transferred. Therefore, when it is determined as Y in step S95, control is normally performed with a definite change state and a short state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit, in addition to the time control is controlled only after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit. There are times when

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A (as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality FIG. 10A is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. Step 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used, a release variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation for disconnection shown in FIG. 10 (B). Pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the out-of-transition fluctuation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the change is performed in step S102. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in a definite variation state or a short time state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories (see FIG. Although the case where it is a table different from 10 (B) is shown, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the total number of pending storages is almost 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1). May not perform the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B as a table used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100 (see FIG. 11). And the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) are selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. And based on the determination result of whether to set it as a reach, the process of step S95-S100 may be performed, and you may make it determine a fluctuation pattern classification. In this case, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (including the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 fluctuation pattern types shown in FIG. 10) and the reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (FIG. 10) Prepare the normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and the super CA 2-7 (including variation pattern types) and select one of the variation pattern type determination tables based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table matches, for example, in the determination of whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” in the prize production process. Whether or not to reach may be determined in advance by determining whether or not it is reached. In addition, in view of the fact that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach deviates” according to the fluctuation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable to configure in advance to determine whether or not to be a "non-reach out" and to perform on-hold notice effect.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 13) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation process, CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Note that whether or not the pending storage number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction specification command has been sent when sending the pending storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag may be set, and it may be checked in step S1121 whether the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Next, if the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been sent, the CPU 56 performs control to send the pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second storage reserve number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, CPU 56, if it is set, a probability change flag indicating that it is a positive change state, a short time flag indicating that it is a short time state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot”, the jackpot start 1 designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the big hit start 2 specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 003 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is "normal big hit", the big hit end 1 specification command (command A 301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is "probable variation big hit", the big hit end 2 specification command (command A 302 (H) And, if it is "Suddenly Certainly Big Variation Big Hit", the small hit / suddenly big variation big hit end specification command (command A 303 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is based on the normal big hit (step S166). In addition, whether or not it is a case to end the big hit game based on the normal big hit, specifically, whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01" or not It can judge by confirming. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S166), the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts the gaming state to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction number counter a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) (step S168).

  The CPU 56 sets a probability change flag and changes the gaming state into a definite state unless normally ending the big hit game based on the big hit (that is, when ending the big hit game based on a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit). At the same time as transition (step S169), the time saving flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time saving state (step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  In this embodiment, when the above process is executed, control is also performed to the short time state when controlled to the probability change state, so the normal state (low probability / low base state) as the gaming state ), There are three states: short time state (low probability / high base state), and probability change state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the fact that the start flag is set, based on the fact that the end flag is set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 13 and 14) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 6 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the CPU for effect control 101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this case, for example, if the big hit start 1 specified command is received, the big hit start 1 specified command reception flag is set, and if the big hit start 2 specified command is received, the big hit start 2 specified command received flag set.

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly definite oddity big hit start designation command (command A 003 (H)) (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control sets the small hit / suddenly positive oddity big hit start designation command reception flag (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S625), the CPU for effect control 101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S626). In this case, for example, when the big hit end 1 specified command is received, the big hit end 1 specified command reception flag is set, and when the big hit end 2 specified command is received, the big hit end 2 specified command received flag set.

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly odd variation big hit end designation command (command A 303 (H)) (step S627), the CPU 101 for production control sets the small hit / suddenly odd variation big hit end designation command reception flag (Step S628).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S501) S652).

  If the received effect control command is any of the fluctuation category commands (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received fluctuation category command in the fluctuation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S65). S654).

  If the received effect control command is the first pending storage number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 stores the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S656). Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to include the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first pending storage number addition designation command. , And stored in the first free storage area of the first start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S657).

  If the received effect control command is the second pending storage number addition designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 101 is configured to store the second pending storage number in the second pending storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S659). Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to include the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second pending storage number addition designation command. , And stored in the first free storage area of the second start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S660).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the start winning combination command storage area. Among these, FIG. 36 (A) shows a specific example of the first start winning command storage area, and FIG. 36 (B) shows a specific example of the second start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 36A, in the first start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. There is. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first start port switch passing process of FIG. 20 and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second start port switch passing process, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start hole. When there is a start winning to the winning opening 14, within one timer interrupt, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number Three commands of addition specification command) are transmitted in a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each storage area 1 to 4 of the first start winning command storage area and the second start winning command storage area 1 to 4, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage count addition specification A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association.

  In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the change category command, and the pending storage number addition designation command within one timer interrupt, so the effect control CPU 101 designates the symbol in the command analysis process. When the command and the variation category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designation command storage area and the variation category command storage area, respectively. Then, when the pending storage count addition designation command is received, it is understood that if the first pending storage count addition designation command is received, the first pending storage is increased by 1, and the second pending storage count addition designation command If it is determined that the second pending storage has increased by one if it is received, it is the first with the temporarily stored symbol specifying command and the variation category command if it is received the first pending storage count addition designation command. 1 Hold storage number addition specification command is stored in the first start winning command storage area, and if the second hold storage number addition specification command is received, the second storage with the temporarily stored symbol specification command and the change category command Store the number addition specification command in the second start winning command storage area (In FIG. 36, the first start winning command) An example is shown in which commands are stored in all storage areas of storage areas 1 to 4 of the storage area, and commands are stored only in storage area 1 of storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area. Has been

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is sequentially displayed in steps S664 and S668 described later at the timing when variation display of the production symbol is started each time variation display of the production symbol is started. It is deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the storage content of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 (B) is deleted. . Then, if the second pending storage does not newly occur, only the first pending storage is stored, so the first shown in FIG. It is deleted from what is stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area, and the content of the first start winning command storage area is shifted. For example, when the variable display of a new rendering symbol is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 36 (A), each command stored in storage area 1 is deleted, and each command stored in storage area 2 The command is shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the pending storage count addition designating command, which are received when the starting winning combination occurs, are also referred to as a command upon starting winning combination when comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of the start winning combination, a pending storage number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number has increased is comprehensively represented. In some cases, it is also referred to as pending storage information. In addition, whether or not to be a big hit or small hit determined in the winning winning process at the start winning (see FIG. 22), the determination result of the big hit type, the symbol specification command which is a command showing the determination result of the variation pattern type When expressing the fluctuation category command comprehensively, it is also referred to as a winning judgment result specification command or judgment result information.

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number subtraction specification command (step S661), the CPU 101 for production control subtracts 1 from the value of the first hold memory number stored in the first hold memory number storage area ( Step S662). Further, the effect control CPU 101 erases one first suspension display in the first suspension storage display unit 9a, shifts the remaining first suspension display after the erased first suspension storage one by one, and The display of the first number of pending storages in the 1 pending storage display unit 9a is updated (step S663). For example, when the first to third first pending displays of the first pending storage display unit 9a are lit and displayed, the first pending storage count subtraction designating command is received. (1) While clearing the hold display, shift the first hold display that has been displayed second to the first display area, and the first hold display that has been displayed second to the second display area Shift to Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the start winning command stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area (design designation command, variation category command, and first pending storage number addition designation) The command is deleted, and the content of the command storage area in the first start winning combination is shifted (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number subtraction designation command (step S665), the CPU 101 for production control subtracts 1 from the value of the second hold memory number stored in the second hold memory number storage area ( Step S666). Further, the effect control CPU 101 erases one second pending display in the second pending storage display section 9b, shifts the remaining second pending displays after the erased second pending storage one by one, and The second pending storage number display in the 2 pending storage display unit 9a is updated (step S667). For example, when the first to third first pending displays of the second pending storage display unit 9b are lit and displayed, if the second pending storage number subtraction designation command is received, the first (2) While erasing the hold display, shift the second hold display that was displayed second to the first display area, and display the second hold display that was displayed third the second display area Shift to Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the start winning command stored in the first storage area of the second start winning command storage area (design designation command, variation category command, and first pending storage number addition designation) The command is deleted, and the content of the second start winning command storage area is shifted (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 selects the background screen of the effect display device 9 according to the normal state (for example, a background screen of blue background color) ) (Step S670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), an effect mode according to the normal state is displayed by displaying a background screen according to the normal state (hereinafter, referred to as It is controlled to be in the normal effect mode). Further, if the effect control CPU 101 is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability variation state flag indicating that it is a probability variation state, and the time saving status flag that indicates a time saving status (step S 671).

  If the received effect control command is a short time state background designation command (step S 672), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen of the effect display device 9 to correspond to the short time state (for example, a background screen with a green background color) ) (Step S673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the effect mode according to the short time state is displayed by displaying the background screen according to the short state. (Also referred to as time-saving effect mode). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time saving state flag (step S 674).

  If the received effect control command is a definite variation state background designation command (step S 675), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen of the effect display device 9 to correspond to the probable variation state (for example, a background screen of red background color) ) (Step S676). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state), a background screen according to the positive change state is displayed to display an effect mode according to the positive change state (hereinafter referred to as (Also referred to as a probability variation production mode). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change state flag (step S677).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S 678). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold display control process for controlling the display of the hold display (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the processes in steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process. In addition, even if it is configured to execute the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which of the effect control process processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  38 to 41 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process (step S800A). In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed (step S6000). It should be noted that whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress is, for example, not during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (for example, the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8007 described later is 0), and the first hold storage And the second pending storage (for example, the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number updated in steps S656, S659, S662, and S666 are both 0). it can. If the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the on-hold display control process ends. That is, even if the start prize is newly generated while the customer waiting demonstration is displayed, since the variable display is immediately started and there is almost no time to display the hold display, the process of displaying the hold display after step S6001 is not performed. The process is ended as it is (without displaying the hold display).

  In addition, even during the fluctuation display of the production design, there is neither the 1st reservation memory nor the 2nd reservation memory, the remaining time of the fluctuation display under execution is extremely small and it is just before the end of the fluctuation display (for example, the remainder Even in the case where it is within 1 second), there is virtually no time to display the on-hold display substantially even if a start-up winning anew occurs. The processing may be terminated as it is without displaying the display.

  Also, for example, instead of starting the waiting for customer demonstration display immediately after stopping the variable display of the effect pattern, the waiting for customer demonstration display after a predetermined period (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the end of the last variable display. If it is configured to start, it is a period during which there is no pending storage even during this predetermined period, and the variable display is not being executed, so it is determined as Y in step S6000 and the process is ended as it is. It is also good.

  If the pending display control process is ended by determining Y in step S6000 while the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command, second pending storage number addition designation) Since the pending indication is not increased even when the command is received, the pending storage number subtraction designation command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command, second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is thereafter received. Control is performed not to execute the processing of steps S663 and S667 of the command analysis processing and not to delete the pending display. In this case, for example, when it is determined that Y is determined in steps S655 and S658 of the command analysis processing and a new pending storage count addition designation command is received, it is confirmed whether or not a customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, If the waiting demonstration is being displayed, a flag indicating that is set, and then, when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is received (Y in steps S661 and S665), the flag is set, and step S663 is performed. , S667 may not be executed. Further, in this case, the process of steps S656, S659, S662, and S666 is also skipped instead of skipping only the process of increasing or decreasing the pending display, and the process of increasing or decreasing the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number itself You may choose not to

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether a new start winning combination has occurred and a command at the time of starting winning combination has been newly received (step S6001). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start winning command storage area or the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36, a new start winning occurs and a new start winning combination is generated. It can be determined that the command of has been received.

  If a command at the time of start winning is newly received (Y in step S6001), the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state) (step S6002) ). Note that, specifically, whether or not the gaming state is the definite change state can be determined by checking whether the positive change state flag (see step S677) is set.

  If it is not a definite change state, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the gaming state is a short time state (low probability / high base state) (step S6003). Note that whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the time saving state flag (see step S674) is set.

  If the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state) (in other words, if it is in the short time effect mode), the effect control CPU 101 holds for determining whether to execute the on-hold notice effect. Whether to perform a lottery process using a random number for determining whether or not to execute a suspension preview effect based on the newly received fluctuation category command using the preview determination table, and to execute a suspension preview effect or not Are determined (step S6004).

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the hold notice determination table for determining whether or not the hold notice effect is to be executed. As shown in FIG. 42, determination values are respectively allocated to each of the on-hold notice determination tables with and without the on-hold notice effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, when it is specified that the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-1 is specified by the change category command in the suspension notice determination table (specifically, the command C600 (H) is received If it is specified that the variation pattern type of super CA 2-7 is to be used by the variation category command (specifically, if command C 607 (H) is received), and if the variation category command is The determination value is assigned only when it is specified that the variation pattern type is −3 (specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C 615 (H) is received). Therefore, in this embodiment, the on-hold notice effect can be performed only in the case of non-reach out, super reach out, or super reach jackpot. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, it is decided to execute the on-hold notice effect at a rate of 5% when non-reach is lost, and at a rate of 60% when super-reach is lost. It is decided to execute the on-hold notice effect, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, it is decided to execute on-hold notice effect at a rate of 80%.

  It should be noted that not only the mode shown in this embodiment but also non-reach out, super reach out, and a variation category other than the super reach jackpot may be configured to be able to be executed for the advance notice of suspension. In this case, for example, only whether or not a big hit is determined based on the variation category command may be specified, and in accordance with the specified result, the on-hold notice effect may be executable. Further, in this embodiment, the case of executing the on-hold notice effect (the so-called on-off notice effect on the case) is shown even in the case of non-reach out or super reach out, but in the case of unreach out Alternatively, the pending advance announcement may not be performed, or may be executed only when the super reach jackpot is reached.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the case of the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) or the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the processing of step S6004 or step S6012 described later is executed to hold on-hold notice effect. There is a case to execute, but as already explained, in the case of the time saving state (high base state), the process of the winning determination for the starting winning to the first start winning opening 13 is not executed and the symbol designation Since no command or variation category command is transmitted (see step S1215A), there may be a case where the on-hold notice effect is executed only on the second on-hold storage.

  If it is decided not to execute the on-hold notice effect (N in step S6005), the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the appearance effect in the normal effect mode (step S6006).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state) or a short time state (low probability / high base state), a specific hold display different from the normal mode hold display is displayed. . The “specific suspension display” is a suspension display for operation display at a predetermined cycle, and in this embodiment, a specific suspension display of a mode in which one rotation counterclockwise is performed at a cycle of one second is displayed. Note that the “specific suspension display” is not limited to the one described in this embodiment, but may be, for example, one that swings in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction at a predetermined cycle, as long as the operation display is performed at a predetermined cycle. The size may change in a predetermined cycle, or the pattern or color in the hold display may change in a predetermined cycle.

  Further, in this embodiment, the appearance effect is executed when the specific hold display is displayed. The "appearance effect" is an effect to be executed along with the display of the specific hold display, and in this embodiment, as the appearance effect, the density gradually becomes darker from the state where the lightness and darkness are thin and hard to be recognized. An effect of an aspect that changes to an easy state is performed. In this embodiment, it takes about one second after the appearance effect is started, and the density of the on-hold display is maximized, which makes it easy to view.

  The “appearance effect” is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, but may be any effect mode as long as it is an effect to be executed along with the display of the specific hold display. For example, not only the concentration of the pending display is gradually changing, but as the appearance effect, the effect of the aspect such that the size of the pending display is small and the visual recognition status gradually increases May be performed. In addition, it is not necessary that the hold display is necessarily displayed in the appearance effect, and if it can be recognized that the player is executing along with the display of the specific hold display, the hold display is not displayed as the appearance effect. An effect may be performed in such a manner as to display a predetermined character. Moreover, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which it takes about one second after the appearance effect starts to be in a state in which the on-hold display is easily visible. However, the effect period of the appearance effect is shown in this embodiment. For example, the presentation period of the appearance presentation may be very short (for example, 0.1 seconds), and it may appear that the hold display is displayed almost immediately.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state), the operation display of the hold display is started while the appearance effect is being executed. Therefore, in the case of a definite change state (high probability / high base state), effects such that the concentration gradually becomes darker while the hold display is operated are performed, and the display of the specific hold display is in progress during the appearance effect An indication of the manner to be initiated is provided. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the operation display of the hold display is started after the appearance effect is performed. Therefore, in the case of the time saving state (low probability / high base state), an effect is performed such that the concentration gradually becomes darker in the state where the hold display is not operated and the operation display of the hold display after the appearance effect is finished Is displayed, and the display of an aspect such that the display of the specific hold display is started after the appearance effect is performed is performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the on-hold notice effect, the specific on-hold display and the appearance effect are executed in the normal effect mode, but it is decided to execute on-off notice effect In the case where it is determined, the specific hold display and the appearance effect are executed in the pre-reading advance notice mode. In this embodiment, while a specific pending display or appearance effect of a normal presentation mode is executed in a mode of displaying a suspended display in white triangular display inside a white circular display, a suspended display is displayed in white. In the aspect displayed in red triangle display inside the round display, the specific hold display and appearance effect of the prefetch notice mode are executed. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the specific hold display and appearance effect of the normal production mode are also referred to as “normal specific hold display” and “normal appearance effect”, respectively, and “pre-read specific advance display and appearance effect of the prefetch notice mode” It is also referred to as “specified pending display” or “pre-read appearance effect”.

  In addition, the modes of “normal specification hold display”, “normal appearance effect”, “pre-reading specific hold display”, and “pre-read appearance effect” are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, but the hold notice effect (pre-read notice effect ) May be recognized as to whether or not () is being executed. For example, while the hold display is rotated in “normal specification hold display” and “normal appearance effect”, the hold display is swung in the horizontal direction and the up-down direction in “prediction specific hold display” and “preread appearance effect”. You may do so.

  In step S6006, the CPU for effect control 101 starts execution of the normal appearing effect without the operation display of the hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number addition designation command, and the first pending If it is a storage number addition designation command, execution of normal appearance effect is started in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a (that is, if there is no first hold storage), the first hold storage display unit 9a The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of 1, and if one hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a (that is, if there is one first hold storage), the first hold storage display unit 9a In the second area of, the execution of the normal appearance effect starts. On the other hand, if it is the second reserve storage number addition designation command, execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second reserve storage display unit 9b. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first one of the second hold storage display unit 9b The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of 2nd, and if the 1st holding display is displayed on the 2nd holding storage display section 9b (that is, if there is 1 second holding storage), the 2nd holding storage display section 9b In the second area of, the execution of the normal appearance effect starts.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a normal appearance effect in-progress flag (no operation) indicating that the normal appearance effect is not being performed without the operation display of the hold display (step S6007). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (in the present example, a value corresponding to one second) to the appearance effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the appearance effect (step S6008). Then, the process proceeds to step S6027.

  If it is decided to execute the on-hold notice effect (Y in step S6005), the effect control CPU 101 starts to execute the pre-read appearance effect without the operation display of the on-hold display (step S6009). In this case, the fact that the on-hold notice effect is executed means that the second on-hold storage is increased by 1, so that the effect control CPU 101 starts the execution of the prefetch appearance effect on the second on-hold storage display unit 9b. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first one of the second hold storage display unit 9b The execution of the prefetching appearance effect is started in the area of 2nd, and if 1 hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold storage), the second hold storage display unit 9b In the second area of, the execution of the prefetch appearance effect starts.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch appearance effect in-progress flag (no operation) indicating that the prefetch appearance effect is not being performed, which is not accompanied by the operation display of the hold display (step S6010). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a predetermined value (in the present example, a value corresponding to one second) in the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6011). Then, the process proceeds to step S6027.

  If the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state) (Y in step S6002. In other words, if it is in a positive change effect mode), the effect control CPU 101 follows the same processing as step S6004 to hold a notice A lottery process using random numbers is performed based on the newly received fluctuation category command using the determination table, and it is determined whether or not to perform a suspension notice effect (step S6012).

  If it is decided not to execute the on-hold notice effect (N in step S6013), the effect control CPU 101 already displays the on-hold indication on the first on-hold storage display unit 9a or the second on-hold storage display unit 9b. It is checked whether or not the display, the pre-reading specific hold display) is displayed (step S6014). If the specification holding display has already been made, it is checked whether or not the operation position of the specification holding display being displayed has become the predetermined reference operation position (step S6015). In this embodiment, the specific suspension display is displayed in the form of displaying in a triangular display inside the circular display as described above, but one vertex of the triangle in the triangular display is directed upward. It is assumed that a predetermined reference operation position is established. If the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the normal appearance effect is not immediately started but is waiting for the start of the normal appearance effect. The normal standby flag is set (step S6016). Then, the process proceeds to step S6027.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6014) or when the operation position of the specific hold display during display is a predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6015), the CPU 101 for effect control The execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is started (step S6017). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number addition designation command, and the first pending If it is a storage number addition designation command, execution of normal appearance effect is started in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a (that is, if there is no first hold storage), the first hold storage display unit 9a The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of 1, and if one hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a (that is, if there is one first hold storage), the first hold storage display unit 9a In the second area of, the execution of the normal appearance effect starts. On the other hand, if it is the second reserve storage number addition designation command, execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second reserve storage display unit 9b. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first one of the second hold storage display unit 9b The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of 2nd, and if the 1st holding display is displayed on the 2nd holding storage display section 9b (that is, if there is 1 second holding storage), the 2nd holding storage display section 9b In the second area of, the execution of the normal appearance effect starts.

  In addition, when execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the suspension display is started in step S6017, the state in which the suspension display is the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the circle display of the suspension display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle points upward.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a normal appearance effect executing flag (with operation) indicating that the normal appearance effect with the operation display of the suspension display is being performed (step S6018). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (in the present example, a value corresponding to one second) in the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6019). Then, the process proceeds to step S6027.

  When it is determined to execute the on-hold notice effect (Y in step S6013), the CPU for effect control 101 already displays the on-hold indication on the first on-hold storage display unit 9a or the second on-hold storage display unit 9b. It is checked whether or not the display, the pre-reading specific hold display) is displayed (step S6020). If the specification holding display has already been made, it is checked whether the operation position of the specification holding display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (step S6021). If the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the pre-reading appearance effect is not immediately started, but is waiting for the start appearance of the pre-reading appearance effect. The preread standby flag is set (step S6022). Then, the process proceeds to step S6027.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6020) or when the operation position of the specific hold display during display is a predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6021), the CPU 101 for effect control The execution of the prefetch appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is started (step S6023). In this case, the fact that the on-hold notice effect is executed means that the second on-hold storage is increased by 1, so that the effect control CPU 101 starts the execution of the prefetch appearance effect on the second on-hold storage display unit 9b. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first one of the second hold storage display unit 9b The execution of the prefetching appearance effect is started in the area of 2nd, and if 1 hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold storage), the second hold storage display unit 9b In the second area of, the execution of the prefetch appearance effect starts.

  In addition, when the execution of the pre-read appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the suspension display is started in step S6023, the state in which the suspension display is at the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the circle display of the suspension display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle points upward.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch appearance effect under execution flag (with operation) indicating that the prefetch appearance effect is being executed accompanied by the operation display of the hold display (step S6024). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (in the present example, a value corresponding to one second) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6025). Then, the process proceeds to step S6027.

  If the gaming state is neither a definite change state nor a short time state (N in step S6003; that is, a normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 101 for effect control is not the specific hold display. The pending display of the mode is incremented by 1 (step S6026). In this case, if the hold storage number addition designation command newly received this time is the first hold storage number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first hold display (for example, in the normal mode in the first hold storage display unit 9a) , White round display) is increased by one. In addition, if the hold storage number addition designation command newly received this time is the second hold storage number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 101 displays the second hold display in the normal mode (for example, Increase the white circle) by one.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal standby flag is set (step S6027). If the normal standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (step S6028). If the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal standby flag (step S6029).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display (step S6030). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number addition designation command, and the first pending If it is a storage number addition designation command, execution of normal appearance effect is started in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a (that is, if there is no first hold storage), the first hold storage display unit 9a The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of 1, and if one hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a (that is, if there is one first hold storage), the first hold storage display unit 9a In the second area of, the execution of the normal appearance effect starts. On the other hand, if it is the second reserve storage number addition designation command, execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the second reserve storage display unit 9b. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first one of the second hold storage display unit 9b The execution of the normal appearance effect is started in the area of 2nd, and if the 1st holding display is displayed on the 2nd holding storage display section 9b (that is, if there is 1 second holding storage), the 2nd holding storage display section 9b In the second area of, the execution of the normal appearance effect starts.

  In addition, when execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the suspension display is started in step S6030, the state in which the suspension display is the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the circle display of the suspension display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle points upward.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag (with operation) during normal appearance effect execution (step S6031). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (in the present example, a value corresponding to one second) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6032). Then, the process proceeds to step S6039.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the pre-read standby flag is set (step S6033). If the pre-reading standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (step S6034). If the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prefetch standby flag (step S6035).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the pre-read appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display (step S6036). In this case, the fact that the on-hold notice effect is executed means that the second on-hold storage is increased by 1, so that the effect control CPU 101 starts the execution of the prefetch appearance effect on the second on-hold storage display unit 9b. Also, at this time, for example, if no hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is no second hold storage), the first one of the second hold storage display unit 9b The execution of the prefetching appearance effect is started in the area of 2nd, and if 1 hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b (that is, if there is one second hold storage), the second hold storage display unit 9b In the second area of, the execution of the prefetch appearance effect starts.

  In addition, when execution of the normal appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the suspension display is started in step S6036, the state in which the suspension display is the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, the triangle inside the circle display of the suspension display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state in which one vertex of the display triangle points upward.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a flag (with operation) under execution of pre-read appearance effect (step S6037). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (in the present example, a value corresponding to one second) to the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S 6038). Then, the process proceeds to step S6039.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability / high base state) by executing the processing of steps S6014 to S6025 and S6027 to S6038, the identification already displayed is displayed. Control is performed to start execution of appearance effects (normal appearance effect, prefetch appearance effect) accompanied by the operation display of the hold display in a manner synchronized with the operation display of the hold display.

  In this embodiment, the operation display of the hold display "synchronizes" means that the timing at which the hold display becomes the predetermined reference operation position is the same timing among the plurality of hold displays accompanied by the operation display. It is to be. Specifically, in this embodiment, when a plurality of specific hold displays are displayed or when an appearance effect accompanied by a hold display operation is performed, the triangle of the triangular display inside the circular display of the hold display The display control is performed such that the timing at which one vertex is in the upward direction is the same.

  The mode of synchronizing the operation display of the hold display is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, even in the case where there are a plurality of hold displays having different operation cycles, such as a plurality of hold displays having rotation cycles of 1 second and 2 seconds, the hold display is upward. The timing at which it is facing is the same timing (in this case, when the hold display of rotation cycle 2 seconds makes one rotation and turns upward again, the hold display of rotation cycle 1 second makes 2 rotations, and it turns up again Direction). In addition, even if there is a mixture of different display modes with different operation modes, for example, there is a rotation display and a rocking display, etc., one of the storage displays is facing upward. When one rotation display is started from the other storage display and the other storage display starts to swing from the lowermost position in the up and down direction, one of the storage displays will face upward again after one cycle of operation cycle. The other hold indication may be in the state of being at the lower end again. As such, the timing at which the pending display becomes the predetermined reference operation position in any form may be the same timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state), a new start winning combination has occurred by executing the processing of steps S6014 to S6025 and S6027 to S6038. When the specific hold display already displayed at the timing is not at the predetermined reference operation position, it waits until it reaches the predetermined reference operation position, and then appears effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display (normal appearance effect, prefetch appearance) By starting the execution of the effect), the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display is performed in a manner synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display already displayed. Therefore, there is a temporal shift between the timing when the start winning occurs and the timing when the appearance effect with the operation display of the suspension display is started, but in this embodiment, the operation cycle of the suspension display is As it is about one second, you do not feel a sense of discomfort.

  At the timing when the start winning is generated, the appearance effect (for example, still image) is displayed in a mode not accompanied by the operation display, and the operation display of the appearance effect is started at the timing when the predetermined reference operation position is reached. You may Further, for example, the appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the hold display may be started in synchronization with the hold display already displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the start winning, without waiting for the predetermined reference operation position. In this case, for example, the appearance effect accompanied by the operation of the suspension display is always executed in the background, and the display of the appearance effect being executed in the background is started at the timing of occurrence of the start winning. do it.

  In addition, as described in this embodiment, after a new start winning is generated, it waits until it reaches a predetermined reference operation position (a position where the operation display can be synchronized), and then an appearance effect accompanied by the operation display of the suspension display is performed. When configured to be executed, a case may be considered in which a new start winning combination occurs while waiting until the position where the operation display can be synchronized. In such a case, for example, information such as appearance effects for the suspension on standby and the mode of the specific suspension display may be temporarily stored, and the processing of S6014 to S6025 and S6027 to S6038 may be performed for the latest start winning combination. You should do it. And, even when there are a plurality of reservations, since the synchronization timing of the operation display in the appearance effect and the specific suspension display is the same, when the operation display can be synchronized with the latest start winning, By simultaneously starting the appearance effect for the latest hold and the appearance effect for the hold that was on standby, the appearance effect with the operation display of the hold display may be started at the same time.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer is 0 or not (step S6039). If the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer (step S6040). Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer after subtraction is 0 (step S6041).

  If the value of the appearance effect period measurement timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the effect period of appearance effect is ended), the CPU 101 for effect control sets a flag (no operation) during normal appearance effect execution Whether or not it is confirmed (step S6042). If the normal appearance effect executing flag (no operation) is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal appearance effect executing flag (no operation) (step S6043).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the specific hold display (normal specific hold display, prefetch specific hold display) is already displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b ( Step S6044). If the specification holding display has already been made, it is checked whether or not the operation position of the specification holding display being displayed has become the predetermined reference operation position (step S 6045). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 normally does not immediately start the display of the specific hold display, but waits for the start of the normal specific hold display. Setting the normal hold / standby flag indicating that the device is on (step S6046). Then, the process proceeds to step S6059.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6044) or when the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6045), the CPU 101 for effect control , The display of the normal specific hold display is started (step S6047). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 normally specifies the position where the normal appearing effect is being performed in the first holding memory display portion 9a when the normal appearance effect is being performed in the first holding memory display portion 9a. Increase the pending display by one. When the effect control CPU 101 is executing the normal appearance effect in the second hold storage display unit 9b, the specific identification hold is normally performed at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the second hold storage display unit 9b. Increase the display by 1.

  In addition, when the display of the normal identification hold display is started in step S6047, the state in which the hold display is at the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangle display inside the round display of the hold display It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where the F. is directed upward).

  Further, in this embodiment, in the normal appearing effect which has been executed before the processing of step S6047, an effect is made such that the density of the suspension display is gradually increased, so that it appears on the appearance In this case, the display is performed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display gradually becomes dark and becomes easy to view.

  If the normal appearance effect execution in progress flag (no operation) is not set (N in step S6042), the CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not the prefetch appearance effect in progress flag (no operation) is set ( Step S6048). If the prefetch appearance effect in-execution flag (no operation) is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prefetch appearance effect in-execution flag (no operation) (step S6049).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the specific hold display (normal specific hold display, prefetch specific hold display) is already displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b ( Step S6050). If the specification holding display has already been made, it is checked whether the operation position of the specification holding display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position (step S6051). If the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is not the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 does not immediately start the display of the prefetch specific hold display but waits for the display start of the prefetch specific hold display. The read hold pending flag is set to indicate that it is (step S6052). Then, the process proceeds to step S6059.

  When the specific hold display is not displayed (N in step S6050) or when the operation position of the specific hold display during display is a predetermined reference operation position (Y in step S6051), the effect control CPU 101 The display of the prefetch specific hold display is started (step S6053). In this case, the fact that the on-hold notice effect is executed means that the second on-hold memory is increased by 1. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 is the position at which the second on-off storage display unit 9b was executing the prefetch appearance effect Increase the read ahead specific hold indication by one.

  In addition, when the display of the prefetch specific hold display is started in step S6053, the state where the hold display is at the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangular display inside the circular display of the hold display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where the F. is directed upward).

  Further, in this embodiment, in the pre-read appearance effect performed before the process of step S6053, an effect is performed such that the density of the suspension display is gradually increased. In this case, the display is performed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display gradually becomes dark and becomes easy to view.

  If the pre-read appearance effect executing flag (no operation) is not set (N in step S6048), the CPU 101 for production control checks whether the normal appearance effect executing flag (with operation) is set ( Step S6054). If the normal appearance effect executing flag (operation present) is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal appearance effect executing flag (operation present) (step S6055).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts displaying the normal identification hold display (step S6056). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 normally specifies the position where the normal appearing effect is being performed in the first holding memory display portion 9a when the normal appearance effect is being performed in the first holding memory display portion 9a. Increase the pending display by one. When the effect control CPU 101 is executing the normal appearance effect in the second hold storage display unit 9b, the specific identification hold is normally performed at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the second hold storage display unit 9b. Increase the display by 1.

  In this embodiment, the appearance effect including the operation display is performed before the process of step S6056 is performed, and the effect period of the appearance effect is performed at the timing when the operation display of the operation cycle of exactly one cycle is performed. Is switched to the normal specific display in the process of step S6056, the normal specific hold display is displayed in synchronization with the operation display of the other specific hold display even when a plurality of specific hold displays are displayed. It will be done. In addition, on the appearance, while the operation display of the hold display is executed, the display is performed such that the density of the hold display gradually becomes dark and it becomes easy to view.

  If the normal appearance rendering in progress flag (with operation) is not set (N in step S6054, that is, if the prefetch appearance effect in progress flag (with operation) is set), the effect control CPU 101 performs prefetching appearance The effect executing flag (with operation) is reset (step S6057).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts display of the prefetch specific hold display (step S6058). In this case, the fact that the on-hold notice effect is executed means that the second on-hold memory is increased by 1. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 is the position at which the second on-off storage display unit 9b was executing the prefetch appearance effect Increase the read ahead specific hold indication by one.

  In this embodiment, the appearance effect including the operation display is performed before the process of step S6058 is performed, and the effect period of the appearance effect is performed at the timing when the operation display of the operation cycle of exactly one cycle is performed. Is switched to the prefetching specific display in the process of step S6058, the prefetching specific suspend display is displayed in synchronization with the operation display of the other specific suspend display even when a plurality of specific suspend displays are displayed. It will be done. In addition, on the appearance, while the operation display of the hold display is executed, the display is performed such that the density of the hold display gradually becomes dark and it becomes easy to view.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the normal hold standby flag is set or not (step S6059). If the normal hold standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6060). If the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal suspension standby flag (step S6061).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts display of the normal identification hold display (step S6062). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 normally specifies the position where the normal appearing effect is being performed in the first holding memory display portion 9a when the normal appearance effect is being performed in the first holding memory display portion 9a. Increase the pending display by one. When the effect control CPU 101 is executing the normal appearance effect in the second hold storage display unit 9b, the specific identification hold is normally performed at the position where the normal appearance effect is executed in the second hold storage display unit 9b. Increase the display by 1.

  In addition, when the display of the normal specific hold display is started in step S6062, the state where the hold display is at the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangular display inside the round display of the hold display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where the F. is directed upward).

  Further, in this embodiment, in the normal appearing effect which has been executed before the processing of step S6062, an effect is made such that the density of the suspension display is gradually increased, so that it appears on the appearance In this case, the display is performed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display gradually becomes dark and becomes easy to view.

  If the normal hold standby flag is not set (N in step S6059), the CPU 101 for effect control checks whether or not the pre-reading hold standby flag is set (step S6063). If the pre-reading hold standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation position of the specific hold display being displayed is a predetermined reference operation position (step S6064). If the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed is the predetermined reference operation position, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prefetch suspension flag (step S6065).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts display of the prefetch specific hold display (step S6066). In this case, the fact that the on-hold notice effect is executed means that the second on-hold memory is increased by 1. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 is the position at which the second on-off storage display unit 9b was executing the prefetch appearance effect Increase the read ahead specific hold indication by one.

  In addition, when the display of the prefetch specific hold display is started in step S6066, the state where the hold display is at the predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangular display inside the circular display of the hold display) It is assumed that the rotation operation of the hold display is started from the state where the F. is directed upward).

  Further, in this embodiment, in the pre-read appearance effect performed before the process of step S6066, an effect is made such that the density of the suspension display is gradually increased, so that it appears on the appearance In this case, the display is performed such that the operation display of the hold display is started after the density of the hold display gradually becomes dark and becomes easy to view.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state) by executing the processing of steps S6042 to S6053 and S6059 to S6066, the operation display of the suspension display is performed. After the appearance effect (normal appearance effect, prefetch appearance effect) not accompanied is performed, control is performed to start the operation display of the hold display in a mode synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display already displayed. In this case, when the specific hold display already displayed at the timing when the effect period of the appearance effect ends is not the predetermined reference operation position, the specific hold display is displayed after waiting until the predetermined reference operation position is reached. And the operation display of the hold display is started. In this embodiment, the moving image data used for the appearance effect without the operation display of the hold display has a maximum concentration for a predetermined period (for example, one second of the operation cycle) even after the effect period of the appearance effect has passed. It is assumed that there is a data length sufficient to display the pending display in the normal state, and the pending display can be displayed without interruption even if the display of the specific pending display is started after waiting until the timing at which the operation display is synchronized.

  Further, in this embodiment, the on-hold notice effect is executed by the execution of steps S6009, S6023, S6036, S6053, S6058, and S6066 to display the prefetch appearance effect and the prefetch specific hold display. As the display is started and the second hold display is digested one by one, the display position of the advance read specified hold display of the notice target is shifted one by one, and finally the read ahead specified hold display of the notice target is digested By deleting from the second hold storage display unit 9b, the hold notice effect is ended (see step S667).

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined in steps S6014, S6044 and S6050 whether or not there is a specific pending display being displayed, whether the specific pending display is a normal specific pending display or whether it is a prefetch specific pending display. There is no particular distinction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the normal specific hold display is already displayed, the read ahead specific hold display is newly displayed, or when the read ahead specific hold display is already displayed, the normal specific hold display is newly displayed. It may be displayed, and it is possible to display the normal specific hold display and the prefetch specific hold display simultaneously, and the normal specific hold display operation display and the prefetch specific hold display operation display. It is supposed to be synchronized.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the gaming state (mode), the mode of the hold display, the presence or absence of the appearance effect, and the synchronization timing of the operation display of the hold display. In this embodiment, when the on-hold display control process shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. 41 is executed, as shown in FIG. 43, the game state is a positive change state (positive change effect mode) and a short time state (short In the case of the mode), the specific hold display is displayed as the hold display, and the appearance effect is executed along with the display of the specific hold display. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state (normal effect mode), the hold display of the normal mode is displayed, and the appearance effect is not executed. In addition, when it is a normal state (normal production mode), you may comprise so that appearance presentation of what is displayed of the pending | holding display of a normal aspect may be performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, when the gaming state is a definite change state (positive change effect mode), when the specific hold display is already displayed, the specific hold being displayed is already in progress during the appearing effect. The operation display of the hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display of the display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, when the gaming state is the short time state (time reduction effect mode), when the specific hold display is already displayed, the specific hold display that is already displayed after the appearance effect is performed. The operation display of the hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display of.

  FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted also at the time of power failure recovery (see step S44), but as shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, it is normal time Since, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, it moves to the production design fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation indication of the production design, the fluctuation of the production design only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command The display does not start.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, the processing of step S8002 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (the change pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is a chance eye design (for example, "223" or "445" as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8002. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 46, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. Determine the combination of the production design that the 3 designs are aligned with the same even design as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols aligned with the same odd symbols.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. Further, in this embodiment, since the stop display is performed in a state in which the left middle, the right and the left are aligned with the odd symbols when it becomes the definite variation big hit, it is recalled that the odd symbols become the definite variation big hit. The symbol that reminds me of such a big hit is called a odd symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the big hit is normal, the left middle, the right, and the left are evenly displayed with the even symbols, so even symbols are not likely to be a big hit (usually a big hit) . Such a pattern that reminds me of not becoming a definite big hit is called a non-deterministic pattern. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs advance notice on the effect display device 9 during fluctuation display of the effect pattern (notice effect other than hold advance effect. For example, step-up notice effect or mini character notice effect, movable object notice effect, effect blade role ) Is executed, and an advance notice effect setting process of setting an effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8003).

  Next, when executing the fluctuation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 47 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. When it is determined to execute the advance effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the advance effect in step S8004.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8006). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts one from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105). Further, in this embodiment, when the movable object preview effect is performed by executing the processing of step S8105, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blade role notification effect is produced. In the execution of the above, an effect of moving the effect blade parts 79a and 79b by driving the motor 87 is performed. Further, in this embodiment, as described later, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86 even when the super reach effect is performed.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8106), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8107).

  FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, first, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the processing to display the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (discard symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. Check whether the big hit start designated command reception flag indicating that it is received or the small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designated command received flag which indicates that the small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command is received (step S8305) . When the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designated command reception flag is set, CPU101 for production control resets the stop design indicatory flag (step S8306), according to fanfare production A process table is selected (step S8307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1 and movable member control data 1), the effect device (effect display device 9 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, speakers 27 as effect component, and movable member 78 as effect component and effect Control of the blade combination members 79a, 79b) is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation specification command reception flag and the second symbol variation specification command reception flag. Note that the effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process processing or the fourth symbol process processing (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 44, the fluctuation pattern). If the command reception flag is confirmed, the variation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately). However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both of the effect control process processing and the fourth symbol process processing, as shown in this embodiment, at the time of the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset at the time of, or at the time of the big hit end, in the big hit end effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  Next, a specific example of the specific hold display displayed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the specific hold display. Among these, FIG. 50A shows a specific example of the normal specification suspension display. Further, FIG. 50 (B) shows a specific example of the prefetch specific hold display.

  When it is decided not to execute the hold notification effect and the normal specific hold display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the hold display is displayed as a white triangular display inside a white circular display. The specific hold display is displayed in a manner that And as shown to FIG. 50 (A), operation | movement display is performed in the aspect which rotates 1 anticlockwise rotation with a period of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is decided to carry out the hold notice effect and the pre-reading specific hold display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the red display is displayed inside the white circular display for the hold display. The specific hold display is displayed in the manner of displaying in. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the operation display is performed in a mode of one rotation counterclockwise in a cycle of one second.

  In this embodiment, as a specific example of the normal identification suspension display and the prefetch identification suspension display, as shown in FIG. 50, the shapes of the suspension display are the same and the display colors are different (in this embodiment, the identification suspension display is in progress) Although some display colors are different), the present invention is not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, the shapes of the suspension display may differ between the normal identification suspension display and the prefetch identification suspension display (for example, a round display and a rectangle display). Also, for example, the normal specification suspension display and the prefetch specification suspension display may be different in the mode of the operation display (for example, one rotating and one oscillating). In this way, it is possible to recognize that it is a specific suspension display different from the suspension display of the normal mode, and it can be recognized that it is a different type of the specific suspension display.

  Next, display modes of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 are explanatory diagrams for describing specific examples of display modes of the appearance effect and the specific hold display. Among these, FIG. 51 shows a specific example of the display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in the probability change state (high probability / high base state). Moreover, FIG. 52 has shown the specific example of the appearance mode in the time saving state (low probability / high base state), and the display mode of a specific pending display. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the modes of the effect screen transition in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

  First, with reference to FIG. 51, a display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in the probability change state (high probability / high base state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 51 (A), as shown in FIG. 51 (B), when two specific suspension displays (in FIG. 51, normal specification suspension display) are displayed in the second suspension storage display section 9b. It is assumed that a start winning for the second start winning opening 14 has newly occurred. In this case, at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (B), the operating positions of the two specific suspension displays being displayed are not the predetermined reference operating positions (in this example, one of the triangles of the triangular display during the specific suspension display) Since the vertex is not in the upward direction) (see N in step S6015), the appearance rendering is not started immediately, and the appearance rendering is waited for.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed becomes a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of triangular display during the specific suspension display is upward) When it is turned on (see Y in step S6028), the execution of the appearance effect accompanied with the operation display of the suspension display is started (see step S6030), in synchronization with the operation display of the specific suspension display which is already being executed. The appearance effect is executed in such a manner that the density gradually changes from a low density state to a high density state while the hold display is operated.

  Then, when the effect period of the appearance effect ends (see Y in step S6041) and the pending display is displayed at the maximum density, as shown in FIG. 51D, the appearance effect is executed. Start displaying the specific hold display at the position (see step S6056)

  By displaying the mode as shown in FIG. 51, while the pending display is operated and displayed in synchronization with the operation display of the specified pending display that is already in progress, the density gradually changes from a low density state to a high density state An effect such that the specific hold display is displayed in such a manner is performed, and while the appearance effect is being executed, the operation display of a new specific hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed. The effect that is played is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a display mode of the appearance effect and the specific hold display in the short time state (low probability / high base state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 52 (A), as shown in FIG. 52 (B) when two specific suspension displays (in FIG. 52, normal specification suspension display) are displayed in the second suspension storage display section 9b. It is assumed that a start winning for the second start winning opening 14 has newly occurred. In this case, at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (B), the execution of the appearance effect without the operation display of the suspension display is started (see step S6006), and the concentration of the suspension display without the operation display starts gradually Perform appearance appearance in such a manner as to change to a dark state.

  Next, the effect period of the appearance effect ends (see Y in step S6041), and as shown in FIG. 52C, when the pending display is displayed at the maximum density, it is shown in FIG. 52C. At the timing, the operating position of the two specified suspension displays being displayed is not the predetermined reference operating position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of the triangle display in the suspension display is not facing upward) ) (See N in step S6045), the display of the specific hold display is not started immediately, and the start of the display of the specific hold display is awaited.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), the operation position of the specific suspension display being displayed becomes a predetermined reference operation position (in this example, one vertex of the triangle of triangular display during the specific suspension display is upward) When it is directed (see Y in step S6060), the display of the specific hold display is started (see step S6062), and the operation display of the hold display is started.

  By performing the display as shown in FIG. 52, the concentration of the hold display without the operation display gradually changes from a light state to a high density state, and after the change to the maximum density, the specific hold display is displayed. The effect display is performed and the effect display is started, and after the appearance effect is performed, the effect display of the new specific hold display is started in synchronization with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed. To be executed.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the case where only the normal specific hold display is displayed as the specific hold display is shown, but even when the prefetch specific hold display is displayed, part or all of the normal specific display is shown. The appearance effect and the specific hold display are displayed in the same display manner only by replacing the hold display with the prefetch specific hold display.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, when displaying the appearance effect or the specific hold display, wait until the timing when the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed can be synchronized. Although the case where the appearance presentation and the specific hold display are displayed in a mode of starting the operation display is shown, for example, the hold is digested at that timing, the hold display is shifted, and the specific hold display being displayed is erased. In this case, the appearance effect may be started or the display of the specific hold display may be started in a mode accompanied by the operation display without waiting until the timing at which the synchronization can be achieved.

  In addition, when the so-called blackout effect is executed such that the display screen of the effect display device 9 is completely dark, and the hold display may disappear from the screen, synchronization can be achieved. The appearance effect may be started or the display of the specific hold display may be started in a mode accompanied by the operation display after the end of the blackout effect without waiting until the timing. In this case, for example, after the completion of the blackout effect, the operation display of all the specific suspension displays may be synchronized and displayed by performing the operation display again from the predetermined reference operation position after the termination of the blackout effect. .

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the operation display itself is not started until synchronization can be achieved (in this example, the timing when the predetermined reference operation position is reached), and synchronization can be achieved. Although the case where the operation mode of the specific hold display is synchronized and displayed by starting the operation display at the timing is shown, it is not limited to such mode, regardless of whether or not the timing can be synchronized, for example The display of the specific hold display accompanied by the operation display may be started from the timing at which the start winning combination is made. Then, for example, the new specified hold display is operated and displayed at an operation speed different from the specified hold display already displayed, and the timing at which the operation display of the specified hold display already displayed is caught up or caught up The operation mode of the specific hold display is synchronized and displayed by changing it to the same operation speed as the specific hold display already displayed (this timing may be during or after the appearance effect). May be Also, for example, a new specific hold display is operated while being out of synchronization with the specific hold display already displayed, and a new specific hold display is made at a specific timing (for example, the timing of the shift of the hold display). The operation display may be synchronized with the operation display of the specific hold display already displayed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, at least a specific effect (in this example) accompanied by the display of the hold display after the game ball passes through the start area (in this example, the second start winning opening 14) , Appearance effect)). In addition, a specific hold display (this is displayed in a predetermined cycle as a hold display in a predetermined gaming state (in this example, a probability change state (high probability / high base state), time saving state (low probability / high base state)) In the example, it is possible to display the specific hold display shown in FIG. Then, when displaying a new specific hold display based on the passage of the gaming ball during the display of the specific hold display, the specific being displayed is being performed during or after the specific effect is being executed. Synchronize the operation display of the new specific suspension display with the operation display of the suspension display. Therefore, since the operation display of the specific hold display is synchronized, when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable, it is possible to secure the appearance of the hold display. That is, when a plurality of specific pending displays are displayed at the same time, if the operation display of those specific pending displays is inconsistent, the appearance of the pending display is poor and the rendering effect using the specific pending display is reduced. In this embodiment, the appearance of the hold display can be secured by synchronizing the operation display of the specific hold display, and the rendering effect using such a specific hold display may be reduced. To prevent.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect mode (in this example, a probability variation effect mode (effect mode for displaying a background screen of red background color), a short time effect mode (background screen of green background color is displayed) It is possible to display a specific hold display (in this example, a specific hold display shown in FIG. 50) which is operated and displayed in a predetermined cycle as the hold display in the effect mode). Then, when displaying a new specific hold display based on the passage of the gaming ball during the display of the specific hold display, the specific being displayed is being performed during or after the specific effect is being executed. Synchronize the operation display of the new specific suspension display with the operation display of the suspension display. Therefore, since the operation display of the specific hold display is synchronized, when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable, it is possible to secure the appearance of the hold display.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a specific hold display (in this example, the prefetch specific hold display shown in FIG. 50B) which is operated and displayed at a predetermined cycle as the hold notice effect. . Then, when displaying a new specific hold display based on the passage of the gaming ball during the display of the specific hold display, the specific being displayed is being performed during or after the specific effect is being executed. Synchronize the operation display of the new specific suspension display with the operation display of the suspension display. Therefore, since the operation display of the specific hold display is synchronized, when the specific hold display is configured to be displayable, it is possible to secure the appearance of the hold display.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the first specific hold display (in the present example, the normal specific hold display shown in FIG. 50A) and the first specific hold display as the specific hold display It is possible to simultaneously display a different second specific hold display (in the present example, the prefetch specific hold display shown in FIG. 50 (B)). Then, the operation display of the first specific hold display and the operation display of the second specific hold display are synchronized. Therefore, since the operation display of the specific suspension display having different display modes is also synchronized, it is possible to secure the appearance of the suspension display when the specific suspension display is configured to be displayable.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined game state (in this example, a probability change state (high probability / high base state), a short time state (low probability / high base state)) or a predetermined effect mode (this state) In the example, in the case of the probability variation effect mode (effect mode for displaying a background screen of red background color) and the time shortening effect mode (effect mode for displaying a background screen of green background color)) Although the case where the specific holding display is displayed is shown, it is not necessary to display the specific holding display for all the holding storages, and even if the specific holding display is displayed for only some of the holding storages Good. For example, when a new start winning combination occurs when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability / high base state) or a time saving state (low probability / high base state), a specific hold display is made by lottery processing using random numbers. If it is decided to use the specific hold display, the specific hold display will be displayed with the appearance effect, and if it is decided not to use the specific hold display, the normal mode hold display will be displayed. May be Even when the specific pending display and the normal mode pending display are mixedly displayed as such, when a plurality of specific pending displays are displayed at least in part, the operation display of those specific pending displays Should be displayed synchronously.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined gaming state (in this example, a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), a short time state (low probability / high base state)) or a predetermined effect mode (this state) In the example, the on-hold notice effect is executed only in the probability variation effect mode (effect mode for displaying a background screen of red background color) and the short time effect mode (effect mode for displaying a background screen of green background color)) Although the case has been shown, it may be configured to be able to execute the hold notification effect even in the normal state (low probability / low base state). In this case, for example, in the case of displaying the hold display of the normal mode not accompanied by the hold notification effect, in a normal state (low probability / low base state) while displaying a white circular display as the hold display. When it is decided to carry out the on-hold notice effect at a certain time, the on-off notice effect is being executed by displaying a red circular display as a on-hold display of the normal mode accompanied by the on-hold notice effect. It is sufficient if it can be recognized.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined gaming state (in this example, a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), a short time state (low probability / high base state)) or a predetermined effect mode (this state) In the example, the specific hold display is displayed in the case of the probability variation rendering mode (rendering mode displaying a background screen of red background color) or the short time rendering mode (rendering mode displaying a background screen of green background color)) Although the configuration for displaying the specific suspension display as the suspension notice effect is shown, it is not necessary to have all the configurations, and only one configuration may be included. For example, the specific hold display can be displayed only when it is in a predetermined gaming state, or the specific hold display can be displayed only when it is in a predetermined effect mode, or the specific hold display can be made only as a hold advance notice effect. May be configured to be displayable.

  Further, in this embodiment, the configuration for synchronizing the operation display of the new specific suspension display to the operation display of the specific suspension display being displayed during the appearance staging and the specification suspension during display after the appearance staging is performed. Although the configuration in which the operation display of the new specific pending display is synchronized with the operation display of the display is shown, it is not necessary to necessarily include both configurations, and only one of them may be configured. For example, it may be configured to have only the configuration for synchronizing the operation display of the new specific suspension display to the operation display of the specific suspension display being displayed during the appearance presentation, and after the appearance presentation is being performed, the display is being performed. The present invention may be configured to have only a configuration that synchronizes the operation display of the new specific suspension display with the operation display of the specific suspension display of.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the case of a probability change state (high probability / high base state: probability change effect mode), while the appearance effect is being executed, a new specific hold display is performed on the operation display of the specific hold display during display. The operation display is synchronized, and in the case of the short time state (low probability / high base state: time reduction effect mode), the operation of the new specific hold display on the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed after the appearance effect is performed. Although the case where the display is configured to be synchronized has been shown, conversely, in the case of the time-shortened state (low probability / high base state: time-shortening effect mode), the specific hold display being displayed is being performed during the appearing effect The operation display of the new specific hold display is synchronized with the operation display, and in the case of a positive change state (high probability / high base state: definite change effect mode), the operation of the specific hold display being displayed after the appearance presentation is performed New to display It may be configured to synchronize the operation display of specific hold display.

  Also, in this embodiment, the case has been shown where the predetermined gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) or the time saving state (low probability / high base state), but it has been shown in this embodiment Not limited. For example, the specific hold display may be displayed as the predetermined gaming state when the high probability / low base state is set, or the specific hold display may be displayed when the low probability / low base state is set. You may configure it.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case is shown where the predetermined effect mode is the probability variation effect mode or the time reduction effect mode, but it is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, for example, it is specified in the normal effect mode It may be configured to display a pending indication. In addition, in the gaming machine capable of transitioning to a so-called "probable latent mode" in which effects and controls that can not be recognized in a definite variable state can not be recognized, it is configured to display a specific hold display in the probable variable latent mode. It is also good. Also, for example, in the case of a gaming machine configured to be able to execute so-called mission mode and execute mission presentation (for example, presentation presenting achieving conditions such as "get reach within 5 minutes!") May be configured to display a specific pending display. Also, for example, the effect mode is changed based on the satisfaction of conditions such as reaching a predetermined time and winning a lottery process regardless of the gaming state etc. In the gaming machine configured to change to the background screen of the mountain landscape or the background screen of the sea based on the winning of the processing, the specific hold display is displayed in the specific effect mode. You may configure it. As such, the predetermined effect mode may be any one that can recognize any mode change over at least a plurality of variable displays.

  Further, in this embodiment, when control is performed to synchronize the operation display of the new specific hold display with the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed after execution of the appearance effect, the hold after ending the appearance effect is performed. During the period until the operation display of the display is started, the hold display of the still image is displayed, and the operation display of the specific hold display being displayed is switched by switching from the start of the next cycle of the operation display to the hold display of the moving image. The operation display of the new specific pending display may be synchronized.

  Further, in this embodiment, the timing at which the operation display of the new specific suspension display is synchronized with the operation display of the specific suspension display being displayed after execution of the appearance effect is the operation display as shown in this embodiment. Various timings can be considered, not limited to timings that can be synchronized (in this example, timings at which a predetermined reference operation position is reached). For example, the operation display of the new specific hold display may be synchronized at the timing of shifting the next hold display after the appearance effect is finished. Also, for example, if the on-hold display is erased during execution of a predetermined effect such as a super reach effect or a so-called blackout effect, after the execution of the predetermined effect such as a super reach effect or a blackout effect The operation display of the new specific hold display may be synchronized at the timing when the hold display of is resumed. In addition, the control to synchronize the operation display of the specific suspension display at the timing of the shift of the suspension display or the timing of the suspension display resumption after the execution of the super reach effect or the blackout effect is executed or executed during the appearance effect shown in FIG. Instead of the control to be synchronized later, it may be executed, or may be executed in addition to the control to be synchronized during or after the appearance effect shown in FIG.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the case of displaying the specific suspension display accompanied by the operation display in addition to the suspension display of the normal mode is shown, but the suspension display can be changed to a plurality of types of modes at plural timings. At the same time, it may be configured to be able to execute suggestion effects that suggest whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes. The second embodiment is configured so that the hold display can be changed to a plurality of types of modes at a plurality of timings, and that the suggestion effect that suggests whether the display mode of the hold display changes can be executed. explain.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  Further, in this embodiment, instead of the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b shown in the first embodiment, the sum of the first hold storage count and the second hold storage count The total pending storage display unit for displaying the total pending storage number is stored. In addition, the winning determination result storage buffer shown in this embodiment corresponds to the first start winning command storage area and the second start winning command storage area (see FIG. 36) shown in the first embodiment. Do. Further, the in-winning determination result specifying command shown in this embodiment corresponds to the symbol specifying command and the variation category command shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control process shown in FIG. 37, in addition to the hold display control process (see step S800A), the pre-reading effect determination process is executed. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing pre-reading effect determination processing in the second embodiment. In the pre-reading effect determination process, the CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not the pre-reading effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67101). The pre-reading effect restriction flag is set in step S67111 described later. If the pre-read effect restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold memory display unit to display a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold memory in the normal mode (step S67116). For example, when the first to fifth hold display of the total hold storage display unit is displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode.

  If the prefetch effect limitation flag is not set, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the past winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (the winning determination result indicated in the winning determination result designated command received this time) All) are extracted (step S67102).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether all the extracted determination results at the time of winning show the determination results indicating “non-reach” (step S67103). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S67103 whether the extracted winning determination results are all values indicating that the variation pattern is “shortened non-reach missing” or “non-reach missing” (Ie, check if there is an out-of-range fluctuation with no reach).

  If all the winning determination results extracted in step S67103 indicate “non-reach”, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S67104. On the other hand, when the extracted determination results at the time of winning are not all determination results indicating "non reach", the effect control CPU 101 causes the total suspension storage display unit to normally display a new suspension display corresponding to the latest suspension storage. Is displayed (step S67116). That is, in this embodiment, when there is a pending storage in which the variable display accompanied by the reach effect is performed, the preread effect is not executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 53, even when there is a pending storage in which variable display with reach effect is performed, pre-reading effect is executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. May be

  In step S67104, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts the latest determination result at the time of winning stored in the determination result storage buffer at the time of winning (result at the time of winning indicated by the command received at the time of winning determination received this time). It is determined based on the hour determination result whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (step S67104).

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 54 (A).

  FIG. 54 (A) is an explanatory view showing a pre-reading effect execution determination table in the second embodiment. Although the judgment value corresponding to the decision item (“Perform pre-reading effect” or “Do not perform pre-reading effect”) is assigned to the pre-reading effect execution determination table for each winning determination result, FIG. 54 (A) In the example shown in FIG. 5, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown in order to simplify the explanation. For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determines a determination item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned (“execute the pre-reading effect” or “Do not execute preread effect”). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 54 (A), the numerical values corresponding to "execute pre-read effect" and "do not execute pre-read effect" in each winning determination result are "execute pre-read effect" as the decision item Or “% does not execute pre-reading effect” is shown.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 54 (A), the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 54 (B), the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although judgment values are actually assigned to the prefetch presentation effect change timing determination table shown and the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 57, the ratio of the determination value assigned to simplify the explanation is shown There is. In addition, in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, S67110, and S67115, which will be described later, in which those tables are used, as in step S67104, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode, pre-reading effect pattern, change timing Or a random number for determining the presentation mode of the suggested effect is extracted, and a determination value that matches the extracted random number is determined as the assigned matter.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not to be executed (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit to display a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode. (Step S67116).

  In step S67105a, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the total number of pending storages in the counter for the combined pending storage number of effects for specifying the pending display to be the target of the pre-reading effect (step S67105a). The value of the effect combination total storage number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802a of the effect pattern variation start process, and is used to specify the pending display to be the object of the pre-reading effect in step S1811. For example, when the value of the combined holding memory number counter for performance for counting the total holding memory number is 4, the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the fourth holding display of the total holding memory display unit is executed Be done.

  Next, in the pre-reading effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in advance is to be displayed (step S67106). In this embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode and a second special mode are provided. However, as described later, the pending display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display is started. Is displayed. Therefore, in step S67106, the final display mode is determined to be either the first special mode or the second special mode. Hereinafter, the first special mode and the second special mode may be collectively referred to as special modes.

  FIG. 54 (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step S67106, the CPU for effect control 101 determines which display mode is to be finally displayed (hereinafter also referred to as a final display mode) using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 54 (B). Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each of the winning determination results (display results of the variable display) in the final display mode determination table based on the extracted latest winning determination result.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect pattern of prefetch effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a prefetch effect pattern) (step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first pre-reading effect pattern and a second pre-reading effect pattern are provided as pre-reading effect patterns. In the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice object is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed in the special mode. The first pre-reading effect pattern is a variation display of the advance target that is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the change display (pending information) of the advance target at the timing of the start winning. The hold indication corresponding to the variable indication (hold information) of the notice object is changed and displayed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at an arbitrary shift timing until the (hold information) is started And. On the other hand, in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing until the change display of the advance notice object is started, The display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading effect pattern determination table in the second embodiment. In step S67107, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the prefetch effect pattern based on the prefetch effect pattern determination table and the total number of pending storages. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or "small In the case of “hit”), a hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55 (A) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a ratio determined for each total pending storage number in the hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55 (A). Decide on either.

  Further, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result is “off”, the effect control CPU 101 uses the hit prefetching effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55 (B). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate determined for each total pending storage number in the out-of-time pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on either.

  Once the preread effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines a change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The determined change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target is the shift timing of any hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined at what timing the shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice object at which the display mode is to be changed. For example, when the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed on the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram of a change timing determination table according to the second embodiment. In step S67108, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice object based on the change timing determination table and the total hold storage number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or "small In the case where the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-reading effect pattern, the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 56 (A) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 56 (A). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  Further, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result is “off” and the preview control effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first preview effect pattern, the effect control CPU 101 The first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 56 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. 56 (B). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") If the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hit second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 56 (C) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice target at a ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the hit second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 56C. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize determination result is “off” and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, The second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 56 (D) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. 56 (D). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  When the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the change display of the hold display when the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-read effect pattern (Y in step S67109) The effect mode of the suggested effect is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestion effects that suggest that the display mode of the hold display changes. Further, the suggestive effect is performed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67110, the effect aspect of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory view of a suggestion effect mode determination table according to the second embodiment. In step S67110, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display, using the suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, based on the latest determination result at the time of winning, the effect mode is set to the first effect mode or the effect mode at a ratio determined for each at-time determination result (display result of variation display) in the final display mode determination table. One of the second rendering modes is determined.

  When the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-read effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of the pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67111).

  When the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, the pre-reading effect is controlled so as not to be repeatedly performed by the process of step S67101. That is, in this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode, control is performed so as not to newly execute pre-reading effect. Therefore, the display of a plurality of pending displays in a special manner is limited. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of hold displays in a special mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be noted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold display unit to display a new hold display in a special mode (step S67112). In step S67112, the CPU for effect control 101 controls to display a new hold display in a special mode, and information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and an effect of the suggested effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating an aspect is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  If the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second pre-read effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, if the first pre-read effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process in step S67108. It is confirmed whether the determined change timing is the start winning combination (step S67113). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not. Then, if the change timing is the start winning combination (Y in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold storage display unit to display a new hold display in the final display mode determined in step S67107. Step S67114).

  Further, if the change timing is not winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display as in the above step S67110 ( Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold display unit to display a new hold display in the normal mode (step S67116). In step S67116 (for example, only when the process proceeds from step S67115), similarly to step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a new hold display, and the final display determined in step S67106. The information indicating the mode and the information indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67115 are stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the second embodiment. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first winning determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the content of the winning determination result storage buffer And erase the first pending display in the combined pending storage display unit, shift the remaining pending displays one by one, and update the combined pending storage number display in the combined pending storage display unit (step S1800). ).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) is larger than 0 (step S1801). The fact that the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 means that it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold memory display unit. It shows. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display) is determined.

  When the value of the shift number counter is not larger than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, the value of the shift number counter is 0 and it is determined that the pre-reading effect is performed (the display mode of the hold display is changed) If not, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1804.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, if it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display), for effect control The CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the effect sum total storage number counter (step S1802a). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the shift number counter (step S1802b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not (step S1803). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b, the fact that the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 changes the display mode of any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold memory display unit. It indicates that it is time to execute the pre-reading effect to be made. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the hold display.

  In step S1803, when the value of the shift number counter is not 0, that is, when it is not the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1804. On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1808.

  Next, the process of steps S1804 to S1805 is the same as the process of steps S8001 to S8002 shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect mode of the suggested effect which suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) performed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect performed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as a suggestive effect (pass pattern).

  In step S1806, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when any holding display is not displayed in the special mode in the total holding display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 suggests in FIG. 58A. It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect (pass pattern) or to execute the first effect mode or the second effect mode at a ratio of the effect (pass pattern) determination table. Further, when the prefetch control effect flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the suggested effect shown in FIG. 58 (B). (Passing Pattern) It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) or to execute it in the first effect mode or the second effect mode by the ratio of the determination table. In addition, although the judgment value corresponding to the decision item (“no effect”, “first effect mode” or “second effect mode”) is assigned to the suggested effect (pass pattern) determination table, FIG. In the example shown to A) and (B), in order to simplify description, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect (passing pattern), and the determination items (“no effect”, “No effect”, or the (1) It is decided on the "presentation mode" or the "second presentation mode").

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the fluctuation pattern of the determined effect effect (passing pattern) (step S1807).

  The processes in steps S1812 to S1815 are the same as the processes in steps S8005 to S8008 described in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S1803 that the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the pre-reading effect restriction flag. If it is, it is reset (step S1808). By performing such processing, in this embodiment, it is possible to newly limit the execution of the pre-reading effect during the period in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode, and a plurality of hold displays are special. It can be limited to be displayed in an aspect.

  Next, the process of steps S1809 to S1810 is the same as the process of steps S8001 to S8002 shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table for display mode change according to the effect mode of the suggested effect, the final display mode of the suspension display specified by the counter for total stored memory number for effect, and the fluctuation pattern. (Step S1811). Then, the process proceeds to step S1812.

  With the process table for display mode change, along with the fluctuation display of the production design, at the start of the fluctuation of the production design, execute the suggestion effect (success pattern) and execute the pre-reading effect to change the display mode of the specific hold display It is a table in which process data for performing control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of process tables for changing display modes are provided in accordance with the modes of the suggested effect (success pattern) to be executed and the pre-read effect. Also, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the suggested presentation (success pattern) determined (step S67110 or S67115) and stored in the prefetch presentation effect determination process (in this example, the first presentation aspect or the second presentation aspect) And hold display of the display object specified by the counter for total storage for display (for example, when the value of counter for total storage for display is 2, the second display for hold in the total storage display unit); Suggested staging (success pattern) in any mode based on the final display mode (in this example, the first display mode or the second display mode) determined in the pre-reading effect determination process (step S67106) and stored Can be executed to specify which pending display should be changed to what display mode to execute the pre-reading effect. Therefore, the CPU for effect control 101 displays a plurality of types of display modes according to the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the on-hold display specified by the counter for total stored memory number for effect, and the fluctuation pattern. A presentation mode determined in the pre-reading effect determination process by selecting any of the process table for change time and executing control of the presentation device according to the contents of process data 1 of the selected process table for change time display mode The suggestion effect (success pattern) can be executed and the pre-reading effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object to the determined display mode can be performed.

  Next, a specific example of pre-reading effect will be described. FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the effect display device 9, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is being displayed, and the two suspension displays are displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) on the total suspension storage display unit. When start winning is done while being done, the aspect of pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display aspect, change timing) and the aspect of suggestion effect are decided, new pending indication is indicated according to the decision result . In the example shown in FIG. 59, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the first pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is the start winning combination (shift number 0) or shift Determined to be 1 time. Further, the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is not displayed in the special mode once, and the first display mode is displayed. It is displayed in the special mode or the second special mode. Also, the timing at which the hold indication is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is the timing of the start winning or any shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to the first special aspect, as shown in FIG. 59 (B1), the timing of the start winning combination A third hold display is displayed on the hold storage display portion in the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). Also, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 59 (B2), the timing of the start winning combination, The third storage display is displayed on the storage storage display portion in the second special mode (in this example, two “x” s are included in “o”).

  Also, even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not to the start winning combination timing (the number of shifts 0) but to any shift timing (here, the number of shifts 1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (B3), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) on the total hold storage display portion at the timing of the start winning. Then, when the variable display of the effect design is stopped (FIG. 59C) and the variable display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively.

  At this time, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the first effect mode, the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display is changed In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 59 (D1)).

  Then, when the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 59 (E1), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing (FIG. An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck on the new display in B3) is performed, and the suspension display in which the black arrow is stuck is the first special mode In this example, "x" is included in "o" and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 59 (E2), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing (FIG. An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is pierced is performed on the hold indication newly displayed in B3)), and the hold indication in which the black arrow is pierced is the second special mode In this example, two “x” s are included in “o” and displayed.

  In addition, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the second effect mode, as the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 59 (D2)).

  When the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 59 (E3), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit (FIG. 59 (FIG. An effect (indicated effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) in which a white arrow is pierced is performed on the withhold indication newly displayed in B3)), and the hold indication in which the white arrow is pierced is the first special mode In this example, "x" is included in "o" and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 59 (E4), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing (FIG. An effect (indicated effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) in which a white arrow is stabbed is performed on the suspension display newly displayed in B3)), and the suspension display in which the white arrow is stabbed is the second special mode In this example, two “x” s are included in “o” and displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, the display mode of the pending display is the first compared to the case of the first effect mode. The rate of becoming the second special aspect having a high expectation of becoming a big hit than the one special aspect is configured to be high. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the first effect mode, that is, when the black arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode with low expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 59 (D1) to FIG. 59 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, that is, when the white arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the second special mode with high expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 59 (D2) to FIG. 59 (E4) is high. By being configured in this manner, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) in which the arrow flies and sticks to the hold display makes it feel that it is desired to be performed in the second effect mode, and the suggestion effect is the first effect mode When a black arrow flies, it is possible to make the user feel that he / she wants you to pass without sticking to the hold display (I want a suggestion effect (pass pattern)).

  60 and 61 are explanatory views showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the effect display device 9, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is being displayed, and the two suspension displays are displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) in the combined suspension storage display unit. When the start-up winning is performed while the game is being performed, the pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and the indication effect mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is 1 shift number or 2 shift number Decide. Also, the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing , And displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect pattern is determined to be the second pre-reading effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the third holding display is a special mode (this is a special mode (this In the example, six lines are drawn on the outside of "o".

  Then, when the variable display of the effect design is stopped (FIG. 60 (C)) and the variable display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes (Second Effect Mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 60 (D)).

  Here, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in (E1) of FIG. While the second arrow display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 60 (B3)) is pierced with a white arrow (suggestion effect of the second game mode (success pattern)) is performed. The hold display in which a white arrow is stuck is changed and displayed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (E2), at the shift timing, The second arrow display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 60 (B3)) produces an effect (suggested show effect (success pattern) of the second game mode) in which a white arrow is stuck. The display with the white arrow stuck is changed and displayed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 60 (E3), a suggested effect (second effect aspect in which the white arrow passes without sticking to any pending display at the shift timing) Suggested staging (passing pattern) is performed. In addition, the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 60 (E3) is performed when it is determined that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is to be executed in the second effect mode in the effect symbol variation start process. As described above, in this embodiment, display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) is flung from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when the arrow bites into the hold display (when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is made), the display mode changes, and the arrow marks any hold display If it passes without passing (if suggestion effect (passing pattern) is performed), the display mode does not change.

  After that, when the variation display of the effect design is stopped (FIG. 61 (F)) and the variation display based on the suspension information corresponding to the first suspension display is started, the first suspension display is erased, and 2 The first pending display is shifted. At this time, a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) to perform display control in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes (FIG. 61 (G) ).

  When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in (H1) of FIG. An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stabbed on the first hold display (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 60 (B3)) is performed, The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 61 (H2), at the shift timing, An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed in which a black arrow is stuck on the first hold display (corresponding to the pending display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 60 (B3)). The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  As shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the pending display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be notified is temporarily displayed without being displayed in the special mode. , The first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the timing of the start winning. Also, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the pending display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning. It is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode at any shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, various timings can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. When the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the pending display may be displayed in the first special mode or the first special mode or the first special mode before the variable display based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display is started. (2) Since the game is changed to the special mode and displayed, the game entertainment can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the display result and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the time of the start winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning, etc. It has the means. In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control is realized by executing pre-reading effect determination processing, effect design fluctuation start processing and the like, and based on the determination result by the determination means, the pending display corresponding to the pending storage (total pending storage display The presentation execution means is provided to execute the pre-reading presentation to display the pending storage in the unit in the first special mode or the second special mode. Then, the effect executing means can change the hold display into the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (timing of start winning, shift timing, etc.) and can display the hold display as a special mode. Control is performed to change and display the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. It is configured to By being configured in this way, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so various display timings of the hold display can be changed. While changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode when the hold display can be displayed in a special mode, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 suggests whether or not the display mode of the pending display changes, which is realized by executing the pre-reading effect determination process, the effect symbol variation start process, and the like. It has a suggestion effect execution means for executing the indication effect (indication effect (success pattern) and indication effect (pass pattern)). Then, the suggestion effect execution means is configured to execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effects are executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is always changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. You may not change it as it is. In this case, when the hold indication is not changed from the special mode to the special mode, and the variable display corresponding to the hold indication (hold information) is started, the change is made from the special mode to the special mode. It is desirable to configure so that the rate of big hit is low. By doing this, it is possible to be more interested in changing the display mode of the hold display from the special mode to the special mode. Also, in this case, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is configured to be changed to the special mode and to be displayed at a higher rate than the state in which the hold display is displayed in the normal state. It is desirable to do. By doing this, it is possible to give an interest in changing the display mode of the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode, and it is also possible to enhance expectation when displayed in the special mode. . Also, conversely, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is configured such that the rate at which the display is changed in the special mode and displayed is lower than in the state displayed in the normal state. It is also good. By doing this, it is possible to make the player strongly desire that the display mode changes from the special mode.

Third Embodiment
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, when the variable display based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is being executed. It may be configured to execute a special effect. The third embodiment is configured to execute a special effect when variable display based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is being executed while the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state. An embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in addition to the effect control command shown in the first embodiment from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100, when the game state is in the high base state, (2) A high base second start winning specified command indicating that a start winning has occurred, and a low base second start winning specified command indicating that a second start winning has occurred when the gaming state is the low base state There is. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 62, of the command analysis processing shown in this embodiment, the processing when the high base second start winning designation command is received and the low base second start winning designation command is received. Processing of the process is shown. The processing in the command analysis processing other than these processing is the same as the processing shown in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, as a command capable of specifying the number of pending storages, instead of or in addition to the first pending storage number addition designation command and the second pending storage number addition designation command shown in the first embodiment A first start prize designation command for designating that there has been a first start prize and a second start prize designation command for designating that there has been a second start prize are used.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, when the received effect control command is the high base second start winning combination designation command (step S1601), the effect control CPU 101 stores the second start winning command storage area. In step S1602, "0" (showing that no special effect is to be performed) is set as effect execution information (step S1602).

  If the received effect control command is the low base second start prize specifying command (step S1603), the effect control CPU 101 sets “1” (special) as effect execution information in the second start win Shows that the effect is to be executed) (step S1604). Further, when there is effect execution information for which “0” is set in the second start winning command storage area, the effect control CPU 101 changes them into “1” (step S1605).

  In this embodiment, basically, when the variable display of the identification information based on the holding storage stored in the hit game is performed in the high base state, the special effect is not executed, but the process of step S1605 is performed. By being executed, it is stored when the second starting winning combination occurs in the hit gaming state, when the holding storage stored when being controlled to the hit gaming state in the high base state is stored. Special effects are to be executed when variable display of identification information is performed based on the pending storage (the pending storage stored when being controlled to the hit gaming state in the high base state).

  In the second start winning command storage area, the effect control CPU 101 stores the storage area in which the variation category command is finally stored (that is, the area in which the latest received command is stored) in the second start winning command storage area. Set the presentation execution information.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the start winning combination command storage area (first start winning combination command storage area, second start winning combination command storage area) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the start winning combination command storage area (first start winning combination command storage area, second start winning combination command storage area) is the same as in the first embodiment. Instead of the first reserve storage number addition designation command and the second reserve storage number addition designation command, a first start winning combination designation command and a second start winning combination designation command are stored.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, variable display of identification information based on the pending storage stored in the hit base in the low base state (a transition is made when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol) is performed. Special effects are performed when As shown in FIG. 63, the information indicating whether or not the special effect should be executed (information indicating that the condition for executing the special effect is satisfied) is the command storage area at the start winning as “effect execution information” Stored in

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are explanatory diagrams for describing special effects in the third embodiment. 64 (A1) to (D1) show an example in which the special effect is executed, and FIGS. 64 (A2) to (D2) show an example in which the special effect is not executed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 64 (A1) to (D1), the second reserve memory increases in the low base state (see FIGS. 64 (A1) and (B1)), and variable display of the effect design based on the second reserve memory When is started, special effects are executed (see (C1) and (D1) in FIG. 64).

  In this embodiment, as shown in (C1) and (D1) in FIG. 64, the special effect is special (not displayed when the special effect is not executed) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is an effect that a cloud-like character image) 9 j is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 64 (A2) to (D2), the second reserve memory increased in the high base state (see FIG. 64 (A2) and (B2)), but the variable of the effect design based on the second reserve memory Even when the display is started, special effects are not executed (see FIG. 64 (C2) and (D2)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, when the second starting winning combination occurs in the low base state, and when there is a retention memory based on the second starting winning combination generated in the high base state, the effect design started based on the starting winning combination Special effects are performed during the fluctuation of. That is, for the second starting winning combination that has occurred in the high base state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an example is shown in which the special effect is executed during the variation of the rendering symbol started based on the starting winning combination.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second symbol variation specification command reception flag (when the second special symbol variation is started) (step). S8000A) It is checked whether "1" is set as effect execution information in the storage area (storage area 1) corresponding to the start fluctuation in the second start winning command storage area (step S8000B). If "1" is set, special effect (see FIG. 64 (C1)) is started (step S8000C). And it transfers to the process after step S8001 shown in 1st Embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect control means (microcomputer 100 for effect control) is the identification information based on the pending storage stored in the hit gaming state in the normal state (low base state) Special effects are executed when variable display of special symbol and effect pattern) is being performed, and variable display of identification information based on the pending memory stored in the special game state (high base state) and hit is stored. The special effect is not executed when the game is in progress, but when the game state is the normal state, the game ball is the second when the hold storage stored in the hit game state in the special game state is stored in the hold storage means (2) When passing through the starting area, the identification based on the holding memory (the holding memory stored in the special game state and the hit game state) stored in the hold storage means Since performing a special effect when the variable display of the broadcast is performed, it is possible to perform the frequency of the special effect is increased, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

  In the configuration shown in this embodiment, particularly in the low base state, the open frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 is not high compared to the high base state, but the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 is long (for example, When applied to a game machine that opens for a long time of 5 seconds or 6 seconds in a low base state while it is open for only 1 second or 2 seconds in a high base state, a game by executing a special effect Can improve the interest of

Fourth Embodiment
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, abnormality information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine can be displayed in the abnormality display area, and the abnormality display area is not covered by the movement of the movable member. It may be configured to be Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment of the present invention is configured to be able to display abnormality information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine in the abnormality display area, and the abnormality display area is an area not covered by the movement of the movable member. The form will be described.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, in addition to the processing described in the first embodiment. An anomaly notification control process is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a movable sub-image display device 51 is provided below the effect display device 9 (see FIGS. 68 and 69). The sub image display device 51 is formed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) smaller than the effect display device 9, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the sub image display device 51, an effect image and the like associated with variable display in the effect display device 9 are displayed. In this embodiment, when the effect image is not displayed, the sub image display device 51 is hidden behind the game board 6 and is in a position (second position) not to cover the display area of the effect display device 9. When displaying the effect image, the sub-image display device 51 advances to a predetermined position (first position) on the front side (player's side) of the display area of the effect display device 9. The sub-image display device 51 advanced to the first position covers part of the display area of the effect display device 9 from the front side (player's side). The effect display device 9 is also referred to as a main liquid crystal, and the sub image display device 51 is also referred to as a sub liquid crystal. In order to display various effect images associated with variable display in the main liquid crystal in the sub liquid crystal, and in order to advance the sub liquid crystal to the front side of the main liquid crystal, it is preferable that the sub liquid crystal be provided in the vicinity of the main liquid crystal.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the abnormality notification control process according to the fourth embodiment. The abnormality notification control processing is processing for notifying the generated abnormality by display of the abnormality notification image, output of the abnormality notification sound, and the like, and ending the notification of the abnormality for which the end condition of the notification is satisfied. In addition, priority is set for the type for each type of abnormality, and in notification of an abnormality, an abnormality having a high priority is preferentially notified (especially, regarding an alarm sound). It is assumed that data for specifying the priority order is stored in advance in the ROM.

  In the abnormality notification control process shown in FIG. 67, the CPU for effect control 101 performs an abnormality determination process (step S1701). The abnormality determination process is a process of determining the presence or absence of an abnormality (for example, an abnormal winning, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a full tank error, an out-of-ball error, a door open error) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an abnormal end. In the abnormality determination process, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the presence or absence of an abnormality and the presence or absence of an abnormal end based on, for example, a signal from an abnormality detection sensor group provided in the game machine. The occurrence condition and the termination condition of the abnormality are determined in advance for each type of abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality (an abnormality has occurred), it means that an abnormality has been detected. If it is determined that there is an abnormal end, it means that an abnormal end has been detected. The occurrence condition and the end condition may be changed by an operation on a predetermined operation unit. Further, when the abnormality detection designation command is transmitted from the main board 31, the effect control CPU 101 determines that an abnormality designated by the command has occurred. Further, when the abnormal termination designation command is transmitted from the main board 31, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the abnormality designated by the command is terminated (abnormal termination is present). In addition, about the abnormality by which the alerting | reporting of abnormality is continued until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off or predetermined | prescribed period progress, determination of the presence or absence of abnormal termination is not performed.

  After step S1701, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether a new abnormality has occurred (step S1702). For example, when there is an abnormality in which the effect-side abnormality flag described later is off among the abnormalities determined to have occurred in step S1701, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the abnormality is a new abnormality. Therefore, it is determined that a new abnormality has occurred (step S1702; Yes). At this time, the effect-side abnormality flag corresponding to the new abnormality is turned on (step S1703). The effect-side abnormality flag is provided in a predetermined area in the RAM so as to correspond to each type of abnormality. The effect-side abnormality flag is turned on while the notification control of the abnormality corresponding to the flag is being performed, and is turned off when the control of the notification is not performed. Multiple new anomalies may occur. In addition, a new abnormality may occur before the notification of another abnormality ends. In these cases, the plurality of effect-side abnormality flags are turned on.

  After step S 1703, the CPU for effect control 101 transmits a predetermined display control command to, for example, the VDP 109 of the effect control board 80, and the like in the abnormality display area of the display area of the effect display device 9. Control is started to display an abnormality notification image corresponding to the new abnormality (the abnormality corresponding to the effect-side abnormality flag turned on in step S1703) (step S1704). The abnormality notification image is an image for notifying of the above-mentioned new abnormality, and is an image of an aspect according to the type of abnormality. The abnormality display area is preset, for example, according to the type of abnormality. The abnormality display area is superimposed on the sub-image display device 51 (see FIGS. 68 and 69) located at the first position in the display area of the effect display device 9 (the area where the image can be displayed on the effect display device 9). Provided in an area not covered (not covered). The abnormal display area may be, for example, a relatively small area which does not disturb the variable display of the effect pattern (such as FIG. 68), or a relatively large area instead of the variable display of the effect pattern (as in FIG. 69) ). That is, the abnormality notification image is displayed large or small depending on the type of abnormality. In addition, the position (position in the display area of the effect display device 9) of the above-mentioned small area | region changes, for example according to the kind of abnormality. Therefore, the anomaly notification image is displayed at a different position depending on the type of anomaly. Each display position may be set in advance, for example. When the abnormality notification image is displayed large (when the abnormality display area is large), other images (including other abnormality notification images) are not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. Here, when the abnormal display area is large, the abnormal display area is fixed, but, for example, the abnormal display area also has a different position depending on the type of abnormality as in the case where the abnormal display area is small. May be

  The abnormality notification image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image (for example, an image of a variable-displayed effect or a demonstration image) displayed on the effect display device 9 or the like. For example, the layer of the anomaly notification image (layer of the same size as the display area of the effect display device 9) is in front of the layer of the effect image (layer of the same size as the display area of the effect display device 9) (player side) The two are superimposed and displayed so as to be located at For this reason, the control of the display of the effect image and the control of the display of the anomaly notification image are executed in parallel separately from whether the image is actually displayed. The layer of the anomaly notification image displayed in the above-mentioned small area makes parts other than the anomaly notification image transparent (the display position of the anomaly notification image differs according to the type of anomaly, so the shape of the transparent portion etc. is anomaly) It depends on the type). As a result, at least a part of the effect image becomes visible. For example, since the position of the above-mentioned small area differs according to the type of abnormality, the position of the abnormality display area in the layer (the position of the abnormality display area in the display area of the effect display device 9) is also according to the type of abnormality. It is different. The layer of the anomaly notification image displayed in the above-described large area makes the portion other than the anomaly notification image opaque (for example, black). This makes the effect image invisible.

  When the plurality of effect-side abnormality flags are in the on state, control is performed to display a plurality of abnormality notification images for the plurality of abnormalities. In this case, when all of the plurality of abnormality notification images are displayed in the above-described small area, all of the plurality of abnormality notification images are actually displayed (the display position of the abnormality notification image corresponds to the type of abnormality). And the shape of the transparent part also differs according to the type of abnormality). When a plurality of abnormality notification images include those displayed in the above-mentioned large area, only the abnormality notification images (in the case of a plurality, those with higher priority) are actually displayed. Is displayed. For example, a layer (a layer having the same size as the display area of the effect display device 9) is created for each of the anomaly notification images, and each layer is superimposed and displayed such that the higher the anomaly priority is, the higher the priority is. Make it As a result, the display control of the anomaly notification image is performed in parallel for all the anomaly notification images separately from whether the image is actually displayed, and the notification of the anomaly with high priority is actually displayed in priority. Cheap. Therefore, depending on the priority of the new abnormality, the abnormality notification image may not actually be displayed even if the control of display is started in step S1704. In this embodiment, the priority of the abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described large area is higher than the priority of the abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described small area. For this reason, the layer in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described small area is not in front of the layer in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-described large area. However, the priority is arbitrary, and the priority of the abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-mentioned large area may be lower than the priority of the abnormality in which the abnormality notification image is displayed in the above-mentioned small area. It is also good. In this case, the layer in which the anomaly notification image is displayed in the above-described small area is in front of the layer in which the anomaly notification image is displayed in the above-described large area. It also occurs when an abnormality notification image is displayed. Also, as described later, when adopting a configuration in which a plurality of anomaly notification images are sequentially displayed in one layer, the highest priority among the plurality of anomaly notification images displayed in the one layer is the other. It should be compared with the layer's anomaly priority.

  In addition, when the plurality of abnormality notification images in which the effect-side abnormality flag is in the ON state are only those displayed in the above-described small area, all the abnormality notification images are displayed without being covered (abnormal display The position of the area differs depending on the type of abnormality, and the display position of the abnormality notification image becomes a position different depending on the type of abnormality). The position of the abnormal display area (the small area described above) in the layer in which the abnormal display image is displayed may be variable. For example, the layers of the plurality of anomaly notification images displayed in the small area described above are collectively made into one, and the plurality of anomaly notification images are sequentially displayed in one layer. In this case, a plurality of abnormality display areas are prepared in one layer, and the priorities are set to the plurality of abnormality display areas, and the highest priority is given to the plurality of abnormality notification images displayed in one layer. The anomaly notification image is displayed in the highest anomaly display area of the priority, the anomaly notification image of the next rank is displayed in the anomaly display region of the next rank, and subsequently, the anomaly notification images of each rank are displayed as anomalies of the corresponding ranking. It may be displayed in the area. Specifically, for example, a plurality of abnormality display areas are vertically arranged (the upper one is higher in priority), and the abnormality notification image with the highest priority of abnormality is the first abnormality from the top. It displays in the display area, displays the abnormality notification image of the next rank in the second abnormality display area from the top, and displays the abnormality notification image of the next rank in the third abnormality display area from the top. In such a case, the display position of the already displayed abnormal notification image is moved by the start of display of the abnormal notification image depending on the priority of the abnormality of the newly displayed abnormal notification image. In addition, according to the display order of the plurality of abnormality notification images in one layer, a plurality of abnormality display areas (each corresponding to the display order. For example, the abnormality display area at the top has the oldest display of the abnormality notification In the display area of the image, the second abnormality display area from the top may display the plurality of abnormality notification images in the display area of the abnormality notification image with the second oldest display (for example, in order from the top) In the case of simultaneous, determine the order according to the priority or at random etc.). In the case where the display position of the anomaly notification image is fixed according to the type of anomaly, for example, a single image when all the anomaly notification images are displayed (for example, a layer other than the anomaly notification image Image data of a transparent image) may be prepared, and the abnormality notification image may be displayed using this image data. For example, only the anomaly notification image to be displayed is displayed by, for example, making the anomaly notification image other than the anomaly notification image actually displayed corresponding to the anomaly generated transparent on the image of the aforementioned image data. May be

  The control of the display of the abnormality notification image is continued until the end timing of the notification. For example, control is performed to continue display of the abnormality notification image until an end command is issued from the effect control CPU 101. The display of the abnormality notification image may be continued by issuing a display control instruction to the VDP 109 or the like each time the effect control CPU 101 executes the abnormality notification control processing.

  After step S1704, whether the priority of the new abnormality is the highest among the abnormalities corresponding to the rendering side abnormality flag in the on state (if there are a plurality of new abnormalities, the abnormality having the highest priority is a plurality of new ones) It is judged whether or not it is included in an abnormal state (step S1705). When the effect-side abnormality flag in the ON state is one and the one flag corresponds to a new abnormality, the new abnormality has the highest priority.

  If the priority of the new abnormality is the highest (step S1705; Yes), operation control is performed to start outputting an alarm sound corresponding to the abnormality having the highest priority (step S1706). In step S1706, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output an abnormality notification sound by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70, etc. Let it start. When this control is performed, the effect control CPU 101 or the voice synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70, etc., generates an effect sound (such as sound or sound output according to effects during variable display or demonstration screen display). Control to make the volume 0. As a result, audio output of the rendering sound is not performed, but in terms of control, reproduction of the rendering sound is continued (that is, control for outputting the rendering sound continues). In addition, before the said operation control, when abnormality alerting | reporting sound is output, operation control about the said abnormality alerting | reporting sound is complete | finished. In addition, when there is a plurality of abnormalities, operation control is performed to reproduce the alarm sound for each abnormality but the volume of the alarm sound for the abnormality whose priority is not the highest is set to 0 so that actual voice output is not made It is also good. The output of the abnormal alarm sound is continued until the output end timing. For example, the voice synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70 continues the reproduction output of the anomaly notification sound until the termination control instruction from the effect control CPU 101 is received. The output of the abnormal alarm sound may be continued by giving an instruction to the voice synthesis IC 703 or the like of the audio control board 70 every time the effect control CPU 101 executes the abnormal alarm control process.

  The notification of the abnormality such as the display of the abnormality notification image or the output of the abnormality notification sound may be performed only for a predetermined period regardless of whether the abnormality has ended. However, with regard to the abnormal alarm sound, when another abnormality having a high priority occurs in the middle, the output of the abnormal alarm sound may end. Such an abnormality may be set in advance. Moreover, the above-mentioned predetermined period may differ according to the kind of abnormality. If the above-mentioned new abnormality is an alarm that is notified only during the above-described predetermined period, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer initial value corresponding to the predetermined period corresponding to the abnormality to a predetermined timer provided in the RAM 122 ( It shall be set corresponding to each abnormality. Such setting is performed, for example, in step S1704.

  After step S1706, if the priority of the new abnormality is not the highest (step S1705; No), if there is no new abnormality occurrence (step S1702; No), it is determined whether there is an abnormality for ending the notification (step S1702) S1707).

  The end timing of the notification is, for example, when the predetermined period has elapsed if the notification is performed only for a predetermined period regardless of whether the abnormality has ended. Further, in the case of other abnormality, for example, it is when it is determined that the abnormal end is performed in the abnormality determination process. In step S1707, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the timer value (timer value other than 0) of the predetermined timer, and when the timer value after the subtraction is 0, an abnormality corresponding to the predetermined timer is generated. It is determined that the notification is the end timing, and thereby, it is determined that there is an abnormality for ending the notification (step S1707; Yes). Further, the effect control CPU 101 does not have a corresponding timer, and when an abnormality determination process in step S1701 determines that the abnormality is abnormal end for an abnormality in which the effect side abnormality flag is in the on state, notification of the abnormality Is determined to be the end timing, and thereby it is determined that there is an abnormality for ending the notification (step S1707; Yes). In these cases (step S1707; Yes), the effect-side abnormality flag corresponding to the type of abnormality whose notification is to be ended is turned off (step S1708). Thereafter, for example, a predetermined display control instruction is transmitted to VDP 109 of effect control board 80 or the like, and the display of the abnormality notification image corresponding to the effect for ending the notification is ended, and the abnormality notification image is displayed. (Step S1709). For example, by deleting a layer, the abnormal notification image is not displayed. As described above, when displaying an abnormality notification image on one layer, displaying an abnormality notification image of each priority in the abnormality display area of the corresponding priority, or an abnormality notification image In the case where abnormality notification images are displayed in a plurality of abnormality display areas according to the order of display, since the abnormality notification images are reduced in step S1709, the display position (any one of the abnormality display areas) of the abnormality notification image is displayed in step S1709. It is good to control to display again according to these rules. When there are a plurality of abnormalities for ending the notification, in steps S1708 and S1709, the plurality of flags are turned off or the display of the plurality of abnormality notification images is ended.

  After step S1709, it is determined whether or not the abnormal alarm sound of the abnormality for ending the alarm is actually output (step S1710), and if it is output, the command for the voice synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70 is output. The output of the alarm sound from the speaker 27 is ended (step S1711). At this time, it is determined whether there is still an effect-side abnormality flag in the ON state, and if there is an effect-side abnormality flag in the ON state, the abnormality having the highest priority among the abnormalities corresponding to the effect-side abnormality flag Operation control is performed to start outputting an alarm sound corresponding to (when the effect-side abnormality flag in the on state is one, an abnormality corresponding to the flag). For example, the effect control CPU 101 starts outputting the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 by outputting an instruction (sound effect signal) to the voice synthesis IC 703 of the voice control board 70 or the like. Note that, as described above, when control is performed such that the volume of the alarm sound other than the alarm sound for the abnormality with the highest priority is set to 0 and the actual voice output is not performed, the current actual output is Control may be performed to raise the volume of the abnormal alarm sound to be started.

  After step S1711, when the abnormal alarm sound of abnormal ending the notification is not actually reproduced and output at present (step S1710; No), when there is no abnormal end of the notification (step S1707; No), abnormal alarm control processing Ends. Depending on the type of abnormality, either the display of the abnormality notification image or the output of the abnormality notification sound may not be performed in the notification of the abnormality. In this case, any one of steps S1704 to S1706 and steps S1709 to S1711 may be omitted as appropriate.

  By the above series of processing, when an abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification image for notifying the abnormality is displayed in the abnormality display area. In addition, an abnormal alarm sound for notifying an abnormality is also reproduced and output. Furthermore, when a plurality of abnormalities occur, an abnormality notification image may be displayed for each of the plurality of abnormalities in the image. As for the notification sound, only the abnormal notification sound having the highest priority is actually reproduced and output. In addition, even during notification of an abnormality, the execution of variable display effects and the like is continued as it is (however, the effect sound is not output to the operation. Also, the image may not be actually displayed in some cases).

  Next, an example of the effect image and the like in this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the drawing, thick-line arrows in the display area of the effect display device 9 indicate that the effect pattern is variably displayed.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an effect image and the like when an anomaly 1 and an anomaly 2 occur as anomalies in the fourth embodiment. For example, an abnormality notification image ("abnormality 1 occurrence") that notifies that abnormality 1 has occurred when abnormality 1 occurs while variable display of the effect design (figure 68 (A), the sound to be output is a presentation sound) Is displayed in the abnormal display area (FIG. 68 (B), the outputted sound is an abnormal alarm sound of abnormal 1). After that, when reach is established and the effect of super reach C is executed, the sub image display device 51 moves to the first position, and the effect image ("super reach C !!") is displayed on the sub image display device 51. (FIG. 68 (C), the sound to be output is an alarm sound of abnormality 1). After that, when the abnormality 2 occurs, an abnormality notification image ("abnormal 2 occurrence") notifying that the abnormality 2 has occurred is displayed in the abnormality display area (Fig. 68 (D)). From this point onward, the sound output is replaced with the abnormal alarm sound of abnormality 2. This is because the abnormality 2 is higher in priority than the abnormality 1. After that, for example, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification of the abnormality 2 is ended, and the abnormality notification image notifying that the abnormality 2 has occurred is erased (FIG. 68 (E), the output sound is the abnormality 1 abnormality) Return to the notification sound). Thereafter, the variable display in which the super reach C is performed is ended, and the next variable display (next fluctuation) is performed (FIG. 68F, the sound to be output is an alarm sound of abnormality 1). At this time, since the super reach C is finished, the secondary image display device 51 is moved to the second position. After that, the notification of the abnormality 2 is ended, and the abnormality notification image notifying that the abnormality 2 has occurred is erased.

  FIG. 69 shows an effect image and the like when an abnormality 5 occurs as an abnormality in the fourth embodiment. In the abnormality 5, the effect image is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, blackout is performed in the display area, and the abnormality notification image of the abnormality 5 is displayed. As described above, the mode of notification of abnormality may be changed according to the type of abnormality. For example, an abnormality notification image (noting that abnormality 5 has occurred) if abnormality 5 occurs with the execution of Super Reach C while variable display of the effect design (figure 69 (A), the sound to be output is the effect sound) “Abnormal 5 occurrence” is displayed in the abnormal display area (FIG. 69 (B), the sound to be output is an abnormal alarm sound for abnormal 5). At this time, the abnormality notification image is displayed larger than when the abnormality 1 or the like occurs, the image etc. of the effect during variable display is not displayed, and the background etc. becomes dark. However, the execution of effects during variable display is continued in control, except that images and the like are not actually displayed. After that, for example, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification of the abnormality 5 ends, the abnormality notification image notifying that the abnormality 5 has occurred is erased, and the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 is variably displayed. The image is returned to the middle effect image etc. (FIG. 69 (C), the output sound also returns to the effect sound).

  As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the abnormality display area for displaying the abnormality notification image is provided in an area other than the weight area. The weight area is an area overlapping the sub-image display device 51 in the display area of the effect display device 9, and specifically, an area covered by the sub-image display device 51 located at the first position, and It is comprised by the area | region (path area | region used as the path | route of the subimage display apparatus 51) covered by the subimage display apparatus 51 which moves between 1 position and 2nd position. That is, the abnormality notification image is displayed in an area other than these areas. Therefore, the player does not hide the abnormality notification image because the abnormality notification image is not hidden by the sub image display device 51 located at the first position or the sub image display device 51 moving between the first position and the second position. Easy to see. Further, by setting the abnormality display area for displaying the abnormality notification image to a region not covered by the holding member provided in the gaming machine, the abnormality notification image is not hidden by the holding member, so that the player is notified of the abnormality notification image. Easy to see. Further, in this embodiment, even when an abnormality occurs while the sub-image display device 51 is moving between the first position and the second position, and the abnormality notification image is displayed, The movement of the image display device 51 is not interrupted. Thereby, control of movement of the sub image display device 51 can be simplified. In addition, when notification of abnormality is being performed, the effect during variable display (effect corresponding to the progress of the game, in particular, the variable display of the effect symbol) is not interrupted, so the variable display can be smoothly performed after the notification of abnormality is ended. It is possible to return to the display of medium effect (display without abnormality notification image) or the like. Further, by setting the abnormal display area to an area other than the area where the effect pattern is variably displayed (FIG. 68), since the abnormal notification image is displayed so that the effect pattern can be visually recognized, it can be smoothly changed after the end of the error notification. It is possible to return to the display of effects during display. In addition, the abnormality notification image may be semi-transparent, which makes it possible to visually recognize the entire image in the variable display effect, and it is possible to smoothly return to the variable display effect etc. after the notification of the abnormality is finished. Further, in the above configuration, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, an abnormality notification image is displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other for the plurality of abnormalities, and the abnormality notification image is different from the effect design during the variable display As it is displayed at the position, the important part of the image of the effect during the variable display becomes visible, and even if multiple types (here two types of errors) occur at the same time, the multiple types of errors Are easy to recognize individually, and it is also easy to grasp progress of the game. Furthermore, by making the abnormality notification image translucent, it is possible to visually recognize the entire image of the effect during variable display, making it easy to grasp the progress of the game. In addition, when a plurality of abnormalities occur, only the upper alarm sound of priority is outputted, so it is easy to hear the alarm sound. Furthermore, since the effect sound is not output when the abnormal alarm sound is output, it is easy to hear the abnormal alarm sound. The abnormality notification image is displayed at least in the area not covered when the sub image display device 51 is positioned at the first position, so that the abnormality notification image is displayed even if the sub image display device 51 positioned at the first position is present. It can be made easy to visually recognize.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, between the display device having the display area (in this example, the effect display device 9) and the first position and the second position different from the first position. And a movable member (in the present example, the sub image display device 51) for moving the Further, an abnormality generated in the gaming machine is detected, and in response to the detection of an abnormality, abnormality information (in this example, an abnormality notification image) indicating that an abnormality has occurred is displayed in the abnormality display area of the display area. Perform abnormal display control. The movable member covers at least a part of the display area from the player side when positioned at the first position, and the abnormal display area is configured as an area not covered by the movable member positioned at the first position. It is done. Therefore, even if the movable member is at the first position, the abnormality information can be easily viewed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the display area of the display device is the display area of the effect display device 9 and is the same as the display area where the hold display shown in the first embodiment is displayed is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an abnormality display area may be provided in a display area provided separately from the display area in which the hold display is displayed, and may be covered by the movement of the movable member.

  Further, as to the configurations shown in the second to fourth embodiments described above, any one of the configurations may be applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, Any two configurations may be combined and applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment. Furthermore, all the configurations shown in the second to fourth embodiments described above may be combined and applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo ream. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, "the proportions are different" means that the proportions are different only in relation such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the like is also a concept including ones with different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, as shown in FIG. (Sound / lamp substrate) having a function by the circuit mounted on the audio output substrate 70, a lamp driver substrate 35, etc., or a circuit mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35, etc. The effect control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments, the sound output board 70 and the lamp. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a plurality of types of medals are inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types according to the operation of the control lever by the player. Is applied to a slot machine where a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbol is turned according to the operation of the stop button by the player and the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination. It is also possible.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but a game machine The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine which seals game media such as balls and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming machine is controlled to be in a definite changing state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit as a big hit type or a normal big hit, and the big hit type is determined as a positive variation big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configurations shown in the above-described embodiments can also be applied to gaming machines that are controlled to a definite change state after the end.

A specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) is displayed after a specific symbol combination is displayed on the variable display device, and then after a predetermined time (a symbol determination stop time + a big hit start presentation time) has elapsed The big winning a prize opening is opened, the one where specific game state starts is illustrated, but after this it is not limited to this, after the combination of the particular symbol (Zoro eyes of the same symbol) is indicated with the variable indicator, in the game territory The specific gaming state may be started by passing a ball through a provided specific area (specific pass gate sensor or winning sensor). As a result, the player can control the occurrence time of the big hit, and even if the ball is lost before the big hit starts, it is possible to have a time to lend a ball and replenish the ball.
Furthermore, a plurality of specific areas may be provided, and the number of rounds of the big hit may be different depending on which specific area is passed. In addition, it is possible to do the drawing of the number of big hit rounds with the passage of specific territory. Furthermore, in this case, if there are a plurality of specific areas, the lottery ratio of the number of rounds may be made different depending on which specific area is passed.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each.

1 pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st holding memory display unit 9b 2nd holding memory display unit 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 special Variable winning ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 78 movable member 80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
Specific display means for displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect of displaying a specific display in a special mode based on the judgment result of the judgment means;
Suggested effect execution means capable of executing suggested effects that suggest that the display mode of the specific display changes
The system further comprises: predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect that reduces the visibility of the specific display;
The abnormality notification notified when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine can be notified in a recognizable manner even when the predetermined effect is executed,
The suggestion effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a first indication effect in which the display mode of the specific display changes after the effect, and a second indication effect in which the display mode of the specific display does not change after the effect,
When a specific display is displayed by a special embodiment, Ri executable der the second suggested effect more frequently than when a specific display is not displayed by a special manner,
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be performed on at least the specific indication displayed in the normal mode and the specific indication displayed in the special mode.
A game machine characterized by